Home

Multichecker V2

1. OK NG Judgment output Block 2 Block 3 V A210 JD32 V f A110 JD16 Adjustment checker Adjustment checker V Vv Inspection checker Inspection checker Numerical calculation Numerical calculation Y Judgment output Judgment output Vv Vv Result output Result output Y Y End End 1 The Block 1 results are not output To output a Block 1 result numerical calculation or judgment output reference the data from both Block 2 and Block 3 2 8 Multichecker A210 A110 Inspection Procedure 2 2 Inspection Execution Procedures User Defined Mode Use external input serial or parallel communication to specify which block is to be executed ea Notes Execution block specification for User De fined mode During test execution Execute All mode is used and all checker patterns are displayed In the case of menu operation Execute All mode is performed by dummy execution and all checker patterns are displayed The Start Trigger cannot be used with User Defined mode Parallel Serial Details I O terminal Command No 1 specified S1 R ee y block No IN4 to 2 No 2 specified S2CR No 3 specified S3 R Parallel input block number specification quick reference table Execution block number Inspection Procedure Multichecker A210 A110 2 2 Inspection Execution Procedures Start to s
2. 000 c eee eee 13 3 2 Creating a Numerical Calculation Program 13 3 3 Restrictions Applying to Numerical Calculations 13 3 4 Symbols Used by Numerical Calculation Programs 13 4 Judgment Outout 3 224 2245 wad aa ii 13 4 1 About Judgment Output 00 eee eee 13 4 2 Creating a Judgment Program 0 eee 13 4 3 Restrictions Applying to Judgments 0 0000 13 4 4 Symbols Used by Judgment Programs Table of Contents Multichecker A210 A110 189 Spreadsheelsz oa wrt ee eet eee Beals As 13 33 18 6 Data MONO an ae a I Ge eon Hes 13 36 13 6 1 The Data Monitor display 22222222 een nern nen 13 36 13 6 2 Data Monitor display setting procedure 13 38 13 7 Checker List ssa tias wh Deu ae 13 41 Chapter 14 Save Data 14 1 Save Dala rear Ser ER Ae ee 14 3 Chapter 15 Useful Functions 15 1 Loading and Storing Image Data 0 cece eee 15 3 15 1 1 Load Image Data ns cn cece heiev iat a 15 4 15 1 2 Store Image Data 0 cece 15 5 15 1 3 Lock Image Data 2 22 2 2 nee 15 5 15 1 4 Resetlmage Data 2 la 15 6 15 1 5 Conditions for deleting image data 000 0 00s 15 6 15 1 6 Hints for restoring images using VBT Ver 2 Vision Backup Tool Ver 2 0 cece eee eee 15 7 15 2 Marker Function fis ive dude bad Roe ede ba wknd bil ee 15 8 15 3 Hide Setting ics ees aes a
3. 16 22 16 4 3 Inspection Using Parallel Communication 16 24 Type Switching ran a a ee 16 31 16 5 1 Items related to serial parallel communications 16 31 16 5 2 Common setting items for serial and parallel 16 31 16 5 3 Type switching using serial communication 16 32 16 5 4 Type switching using parallel communication 16 32 16 5 5 Points of caution regarding type switching 16 33 Saving Type Dalaran era er angel 16 34 16 6 1 Items related to serial and parallel communication 16 34 16 6 2 Saving type data using serial communication 16 34 Template Smart matching Re registration 0 0000 ee 16 35 16 7 1 Serial and Parallel Re registration 000005 16 35 16 7 2 Communication Settings 0 nennen nen 16 36 16 7 3 Re registration Method 2 cece eee eee ee 16 37 16 7 4 Notes Regarding Execution Order for Re registration 16 42 Switching the Display Camera A210 only 0 00 cee eee 16 44 16 8 1 Serial Parallel Settings 2 2222eee seen ee 16 44 16 8 2 Communication Settings 00 cee eee een nn 16 45 16 8 3 Using Serial Input to Switch the Display Camera 16 45 16 8 4 Using Parallel Input to Switch the Display Camera 16 46 Referencing and Changing Maximum Minimum
4. K n nCR Response to reference 22 01 to 96 Gray Scale Edge Threshold Change threshold G n n PR value 01 to 96 YAA C Change complete eae 96 Input the input command after confirming that the READY signal has been output from the parallel port The range for for the A110 is 01 to 48 16 10 2 Referencing the threshold value Type specification 0 Gray Scale Edge Checker can be omitted if the setting is 0 1 Position Adjustment 1 Horizontal Checker 1 2 Position Adjustment 2 Vertical Checker 2 Checker No 01 to 96 The following is output if the Gray Scale Edge Threshold value is referenced normally K n n CR The set threshold value 1 to 255 The set type output even if the setting 0 was omitted in the request Checker No 01 to 96 16 50 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 10 Referencing and Changing Gray Scale Edge Threshold Values 16 10 3 Changing the threshold value GD 7 Type specification 0 Gray Scale Edge Checker can be omitted if the setting is 0 1 Position Adjustment 1 Horizontal Checker 1 2 Position Adjustment 2 Vertical Checker 2 Threshold value 1 to 255 1 Checker No 01 to 96 1 Specify the threshold value in the format 1 to 255 Example To change the threshold value to 50 Correct G01 50 0 False G01 050 0 The following is output if the Gray Scale Ed
5. Multichecker A210 A110 Inspection Procedure 2 10 Area Setup and Out of Area Range Setting In the case of images for which the correction angle is 0 there are sections where the off screen area is displayed Areas cannot be set in these sections For checkers that generate an error at execution due to correction resulting in the image moving off the screen the checker pattern is displayed at the setting position For the area settings at such times changes in the area are done from this position The same applies for the next executed checker at the position of the area setting In some cases due to the next execution position and depending on the amount of correction area settings may not be possible even though they are inside the screen cases when the setting position cannot be set inside the screen In such cases the error message Position is out of image range is displayed If the error occurs when you are making area settings the area coordinates are returned to their original values A Checker area N Mask area Be Image There are some situations in which an error is not generated when a checker is adjusted out of the screen area by a position and rotation adjuster In these situations the area setting cannot be made without modification Move the area to the centre of the screen before setting the area again Area setting image display 1 Adjusting with a rotation angle An adjusted image is dis
6. Reference point F Note The adjustment amount that can be calculated in each mode is as described above but when you are following a position and rotation adjuster it does not always work this way For example you are look for AX and AY for the position and rotation adjuster set in Binary Edge Pos Adj mode but you can also look for Ad rotation angle if it follows a position and rotation adjuster set in Binary Edge Hor Det Rot Adj mode 4 15 Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 2 The Various Modes for Position Rotation Adjustment Checkers Priority For position adjustment using binary edge checkers or position adjustment using gray scale edge checkers the checkers can be prioritized Either horizontal or vertical direction checkers can be given priority Whether or not to apply adjustment using a second checker can be determined according to the result of the prioritized checker Checker setting Priority not specified Priority specified Vertical position adjuster Horizontal position adjuster Direction of misalignment Priority to vertical adjustment Vertical Horizontal Piste position position g adjuster adjuster Priority to horizontal adjustment Direction of Priority given to horizontal adjustment misalignment Prioritization can be used to prioritize the horizontal checker prevent the vertica
7. 1 Select Camera Select either the camera A or camera B image for operating the Position Adjustment checker 2 Checker Setting Use this to create the checker and set items such as the scan conditions 3 Slice Level No Select the Slice Level No for the base checker 4 Base Pos Execute a test to register the base point for adjustment 5 Pos Rot Adj Group Set which checker is to be used for adjustment in the case that you are using multiple settings for position and rotation adjustment Select a group number rm Refer to 4 4 Position Adjustment Groups for details 6 Delete Checker Use this to delete a checker ia Note If you delete a Position Adjustment Checker the inspection results for all checkers that follow the deleted checker are cleared Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 4 Make the Checker settings Select Checker Setting to display the checker setting menu 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 Feat Extr One Chkr Pos 2 AEAT 21 Shape Rect 206 200 305 279 White Object Object Area lt 245760 Filter Sorting Sorting Order Des Labeling Boundary ON OFF Shape The shape is fixed at Rect rectangle and cannot be changed Area Use this to move and set the checker area Object Select whether black or white pixels within the object area
8. A button Switches between right and left rotation The arc shape cannot be fixed is any part of the arc is outside the screen area Make sure to set the arc so that it is all within the screen area Inspection Procedure Multichecker A210 A110 2 11 Checker Area and Marker Area Setting Method 2 11 3 Line Press ENTER to switch between Move all Move start point Move end point and Fix Press C to go in the opposite direction Use the cursor lever to move the whole area the start point and the end point Move all Move start point Move end point ENTER ENTER h o a m au m au ENTER _ Fix nn Cc c IES Note When setting a line shape for position and rotation adjustment only a horizontal line can be set when the scanning direction is horizontal and only a vertical line can be set when the scanning direction is vertical Diagonal lines cannot be set 2 11 4 Polygonal line Press ENTER to switch between Move all and Set node Press C to go in the opposite direction When moving a node pressing A twice adds an additional node and pressing A and B deletes a node Adding a node Use the cursor lever to move the added node then press ENTER to fix it Press C if you wish to cancel the addition and revert to Set node mode More nodes can be added up to a maximum of 16 Deleting a node Delete the selected node Nodes can be deleted until only the minimum three nodes remain C Cancel addition
9. Next Displays the edge immediately following the one currently being displayed C Esc Pressing C returns to the previous checker setting menu 10 12 Multichecker A210 A110 Gray Scale Edge Checkers 10 2 Gray Scale Edge Checker Setup 10 2 Gray Scale Edge Checker Setup Procedure 1 Set the number of the gray scale edge checker to be created 2 For the A210 select which camera A or B screen you will move the gray scale edge checker in This is fixed at A in the case of the A110 3 Select Checker Setting then Shape 4 Select Shape from the menu and select either line scanning or plane scanning 5 Select either horizontal or vertical as the scanning direction 6 Select projection scanning or single scanning as the scanning method i Note With line scanning direction and scanning method cannot be selected 7 Select Area from the menu and set the coordinates for the inspection area w See 2 11 Checker Area and Marker Area Setting Method for details of how to set the area re Note If the length of the X coordinate if a horizontal scan or the Y coordinate if a vertical scan is less than 12 pixels the area of the gray value edge checker cannot be set 8 Select Edge Condition from the menu and select whether to detect edges as differential value changes from light to dark or dark to light or both 9 At Edge Thres Value set the differential value threshold for the edge that you want to detect
10. Note that serial input is not complete until the CR Odh terminator byte arrives If acommand is ignored even though it is correct send the terminator byte CR Odh and then input the command again Switching types may take some time 16 3 2 Key Emulate Data STX Key code ETX External device to ICH 1 to 9 A to C eS Note Transmission Notes No response is returned from the A210 A110 16 19 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 3 Serial Parallel Communication Command Tables 16 3 3 Parallel Signal Allocation Table RDY READY Inspection preparation complete ERR ERROR Error signal REN REND Image capture complete STR STROB Data output complete signal when handshaking is executed OVF OVERFLOW Output signal when numerical calculation overflow occurs D1 to D8 Inspection result output signal judgment output or numerical calculation STA START Start signal inspection timing instruction signal ACK Data reception complete signal when handshaking is executed ACK STA specifies execution of the specific substitution formula when inspection starts TYP TYPE Product switch execution timing IN1 IN1 to 2 User Defined execu tion Block No spec ification register No image capture specification for re inspection IN1 to 6 Type No specifica tion register for Typ
11. Number Type No 33 to 64 and No 56 to 96 Use the cursor lever to change pages The page structure is as follows 13 4 Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 13 7 Checker List Position Rotation Adjustment Exposure Adjustment Line Checker Dot Judgment Line Checker Land Judgment Binary Window Checker Gray Scale Window Checker Binary Edge Checker Page 2 2 Gray Scale Edge Checker Feature Extraction Smart Matching Numerical Calculation Register Judgment Output R register Judgment Output D register Use the cursor lever to switch the checker number to display 32 items are displayed at a time 1 to 32 33 to 64 and 65 to 96 13 42 Chapter 14 Save Data 14 1 Sava Data sci 22 ee ep aus 14 3 Save Data Multichecker A210 A110 14 2 Multichecker A210 A110 Save Data 14 1 Save Data 14 1 Save Data Saves the settings If setting data is not saved any changes made will be lost when the power is turned off Procedure for saving data When checker and other settings are newly changed a warning message is displayed at the bottom of the main menu until the data is saved Data Changed but not saved After POWER OFF changes will be lost The following cases are exceptions to this When making settings using the setting help tools When switching types and Start Type is set to No 1
12. 13 31 Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 13 4 Judgment Output 13 4 4 Symbols Used by Judgment programs Note The checker numbers in brackets are for the A110 Checker used Program Checker No Referenced symbol data Position Rotation Adjustment Expasure Adjustment Line Checker 1 Dots pixel Land Binary Window Checker Gray Scale Window Checker Binary Edge Checker 01 to 96 Gray Scale Edge Check y Scale Edge Checker 01 to 48 Feature Extractor Smart Matching A210 Matching A110 Numerical Calculation Precious Numerical Calculation Results Judgement Output R register Judgement Output D register 13 32 Multichecker A210 A110 Optional Memory 13 5 Spreadsheets 13 5 Spreadsheets When executing the total number of scans and errors as well as the count average dispersal value maximum value minimum value and range of each of the OK and NG outputs of the designated checker are counted and displayed However scans are not counted unless at least one checker has been set The image cannot be changed once you enter the Spreadsheets menu so if you wish to be able to see a particular image change to the required image before entering the Spreadsheets menu TYPE 1 3 SPREADSHEETS ee gt Iten is 0 Err tines MR 2 OK Count Average Disperse 4 4 39 10415 16 50 Ho 01 05 AsS
13. 2 Select MATCHING 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 GEE MATCHING 41 One Chkr Pos Adj 42 Theta Rot Adj 43 One Chkr Rot Adj 44 Two Chkr Rot Adj Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 3 Select One Chkr Rot Adj The setting menu for one checker rotation adjustment using matching is displayed Use Select Camera to select the camera and Delete Checker to delete the checker as required 1 POS ROT ADJ DEREN No 1 Yizzzaz Matching One Chkr Rot ees Checker Setting Base Pos ae 2 3 4 Pos Rot Adj Group 5 Delete Checker 1 Select Camera Select either the camera A or camera B image for operating the Position Adjustment checker 2 Checker Setting Use this to create the checker and set items such as the scan conditions i Note In the case of Two Checker Rotation Adjustment Checker 1 and Checker 2 are displayed 3 Base Pos Execute a test to register the base point for adjustment 4 Pos Rot Adj Group Set which checker is to be used for adjustment in the case that you are using multiple settings for position and rotation adjustment Select a group number rm Refer to 4 4 Position Adjustment Groups for details 5 Delete Checker Use this to delete a checker eS Note If you delete a Position Adjustment checker the inspection results for all checkers that follow the deleted checker are clea
14. 2 2222 sense 2 34 Deleting a Checker z2r r nn ees 2 35 Multichecker A210 A110 Inspection Procedure 2 1 Sequence for Checker Setup 2 1 Sequence for Checker Setup The Checker Setting menu includes some items like position and rotation adjustment group number and exposure adjustment group number which must be set in advance in order for data entry to be accepted The same applies when referring to checker data in program input for numerical calculation and judgment output Use the following sequence when setting up type data for the Multichecker Environment settings Y Select type Y Set binarization levels Y Capture image Y Set position and rotation adjusters Y Set exposure adjusters Y Set inspection checkers Y Set conversion data Y Set numerical calculations Y Set judgment output Y Set data monitor Y Set spreadsheets Inspection Procedure Multichecker A210 A110 2 2 Inspection Execution Procedures 2 2 Inspection Execution Procedures Broadly broken down when you initiate and inspection by pressing Start the procedure order is 1 Image capture 2 Adjustment by the adjustment checkers position rotation and exposure 3 Inspection and judgment by the inspection checkers and 4 Numerical calculation and result output Inspection checkers execute in numerical ord
15. 22 Search Area Set the search area in the photographed image The checker will detect objects that resemble the template within the search area i Note The search area can be set as a square area using the cursor lever but since setting the entire range of the photographed image as the search area will slow down the image processing please set the search area as the necessary range Position adjustments make it possible to set a very limited search area Even in a very small search area designating the smart matching checker as a position adjustment group number allows the inspection to be performed without deviating from the target object 12 4 Multichecker A210 A110 Smart Matching 12 1 Smart Matching 23 Sequence Set the matching search conditions Detailed conditions can be set for the sequence in which the search is to be executed Multi Checker A100 Yer 1 0 TYPE 1 37 MATCHING Jud HG Ho 1 Detected 0 MMMChecker Setting 23 Sete NudgnentResuit 1 0 60 1 0 60 Step Select the step of the sequence that sets the search conditions There are five steps 1st to 5th Set the search conditions for each step Accuracy Acc Adjust the level of each step 1st to 5th to match the checker level of the search object and to perform a stable search Each accuracy value shows a number of pixels You can select a search accuracy of 16 pixels 8 pixels 4 pixels 2 pixels 1 pixel or S sub pixels
16. Block 1 adjustment checker Vv Vv Block 2 numerical calculation Block 2 adjustment checker Vv Vv Block 3 numerical calculation Block 3 adjustment checker Block 1 inspection checker Vv Block 2 inspection checker V Block 3 inspection checker gt Result output Vv Block 1 judgment output Vv Block 2 judgment output Vv Block 3 judgment output V NZ End 2 2 Inspection Execution Procedures Inspection Procedure Multichecker A210 A110 2 2 Inspection Execution Procedures Autom Switch Automatic Switch Mode The checkers in Block 1 are executed in order and if the judgment output JD32 for the A210 and JD16 for the A110 is OK Block 2 is executed and if it is NG Block 3 is executed Only the executed checker patterns are displayed sr Notes During test execution Execute All mode is used and all checker patterns are displayed In the case of menu operation Execute All mode is performed by dummy execution and all checker patterns are displayed Start V Adjustment checker Block 1 Inspection checker 1 Numerical calculation Vv Al Judgment output
17. Setting a Horizontal Detection Rotation Adjustment Checker or a Vertical Detection Rotation Adjustment Checker that uses Gray Edge Detection A210 only 4 31 Setting One Checker Position Adjustment Checker that uses Feature Extraction 4 35 Setting a Theta Rotation Adjustment Checker that uses Feature Extraction A210 only 4 39 Setting One Checker and Two Checker Rotation Adjustment Checkers that use Feature Extraction A210 only 4 43 Setting One Checker Position Adjustment that uses Matching 4 48 Setting Theta Rotation Adjustment that uses Matching A210 only 4 52 Setting One Checker Rotation Adjustment and Two Checker Rotation Adjustment that uses Matching A210 only 4 56 4 4 Position Adjustment Groups 4 60 Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 1 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 1 Position and Rotation Adjustment The A210 is equipped with a position and rotation adjustment function position adjustment only in the case of the A110 for performing position adjustment You can set up to a maximum of 96 adjustment checkers for the A210 and 48 for the A110 Although the A110 is not equipped with a rotation adjustment function in this document the function is described as position and rotation adjustment Position and rotation adjusters find
18. The reference point is the position of the centre of gravity obtained by the feature extractor Any point can be selected from a maximum of 10 detection results The angle of rotation is the difference between the angle of the principal axis when the reference point is measured and the angle of the principal axis at the time of detection Angle of principal axis The principal axis is obtained by feature extraction as a value in the range 90 to 90 degrees This means that a workpiece will not be correctly adjusted for rotation if it has rotated by more than 90 degrees Note that the principal axis is the same for the two items shown below Principal axis of inertia P A 4 11 Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 2 The Various Modes for Position Rotation Adjustment Checkers Feature extractor One checker rotation adjustment A210 only The amount of adjustment AX AY AB can be calculated from the results of using a single feature extractor as the base checker Only rectangle can be set as the shape The reference point is the position of the centre of gravity obtained by the feature extractor Any two points can be selected from a maximum of 10 detection results and the centre between the two points used as the reference point Reference point Feature extractor Two checker rotation adjustment A210 only The amount of adjustment AX AY A9 can be calculated from the results
19. 10 Select Condition from the menu and enter the conditions for processing i Note Only the filter parameter value can be set with line scanning or projection scanning 11 Select Detect Position from the menu and select the method by which they are detected 12 With reference to the detection count at the top of the screen set the upper and lower limits at Detected Judgment 13 Select the position and rotation adjustment group number 10 13 Gray Scale Edge Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 10 2 Gray Scale Edge Checker Setup 10 14 Chapter 11 Feature Extraction 11 1 Feature Extraction 22 02 a ee 11 3 11 1 1 Main Menu 2 0 cece ene eee 11 3 11 1 2 Checker Setting 00 eeeeeeee 11 4 11 1 3 Condition Setting va bw ee ee Sawa 11 6 11 1 4 Select The Adjustment Group 11 10 TIIS Result nenn en 11 10 11 2 Output Values for Detection Results 11 12 11 3 Feature Extraction Setup 11 14 Feature Extraction Multichecker A210 A110 11 2 Multichecker A210 A110 Feature Extraction 11 1 Feature Extraction 11 1 Feature Extraction A feature extractor is used by creating a checker area as required for the area to be inspected and inspecting the area to count the number of specified objects and to detect their Feature areas centres of gravity perimeter lengths projection widths principal axes etc The feature extr
20. 61 Chapter 17 Vision Backup Tool Ver 2 17 1 Vision Backup Tool Ver 2 ns use ea et 17 3 Chapter 18 Error Output 18 1 Error Processing eresien a ee ee re ne re 18 3 18 2 Error Signal Output Conditions Parallel cee eee 18 4 Chapter 19 The Setting Help Tools 19 1 Use Setting Help Tools to Adjust Settings Before Inspecting 19 3 Chapter 20 Specifications 20 1 SpPasilieall ns kessa tan neh 20 3 Chapter 21 Menu Layout 214 Menu Layout lt cnacses en sacks elegans sect k aoa meulees s 21 3 Manual Revision History viii Chapter 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 Screens and Basic Operations Main Screen tl ae ee 1 3 KOVPad ssi eis 1 5 1 2 1 Keypad ar ee sty ie 1 5 1 2 2 Operating the Cursor lever ENTER button 1 6 Main Screen Operations 0c cece nn 1 7 1 3 1 Menu Selection 00 ccc eee 1 7 1 3 2 Switching the Image Displayed onthe Monitor 0 0 ccc cece eee 1 8 1 3 3 Changing Display Items 1 10 Setting Numerical Values 00000c0eeeee 1 13 Screens and Basic Operations Multichecker A210 A110 Multichecker A210 A110 Screens and Basic Operations 1 1 Main Screen 1 1 Main Screen Multichecker A210 Ver 1 0 TYPE 1 1 TYPE 2 SLICE LEVEL 3 CHECKER 4 DATA MONITOR 5 SPREADSHEETS 6 CONVERSION DATA 7 ENVIRONMENT 8 HIDE SETTING 9 SAVE DATA 10 SETTING HELP TOOLS A Start B I
21. A Test Execute a test B Pos Dsp Display a representation of the image you took C Esc Return to the previous menu A A 12 16 Multichecker A210 A110 Smart Matching 12 2 Smart Matching Checker Setup 12 2 Smart Matching Checker Setup For the A210 1 2 10 11 12 13 14 Set the number of the matching checker to be created From Select camera select which camera A or B will supply the image on which the checker will be activated Select Checker Setting then Template Set the coordinates of the template area Set the output point for the detected point coordinates Set the output point somewhere within the template area Press A Tmp Cnt to set the point in the centre of the area Set the search area Set only the area necessary keeping in mind the effects of the search area size on processing speed Set the sequence Set the search conditions for each step keeping in mind the effects of these conditions on the detected objects and search time Set data output conditions if necessary When searching for multiple objects in a single search area it is easier to determine which detection results correspond to which search object data output conditions are set Enter subtraction settings if necessary Select Subtraction from the menu and select Yes Set the subtracted area judgment Set the upper limit value for the area of detected pixels from the subtraction r
22. Checker z Number Reference Data A110 in brackets i Program Checker Symbol AX amount of position adjustment in the horizontal direction AY amount of position adjustment in the vertical direction Position 01 to 64 A9 amount of angular rotation adjustment Rotation 01 io 48 A210 only 2 Adjustment 3 o X coordinate 6 6 X axis projection distance 3 Y coordinate 3 6 6 Y axis projection distance Exposure 01 to 96 Average gray value Adjustment 01 to 48 Adjustment amount 01 to 96 Number of dots 01 to 48 Binary Window 01 to 96 Checker 01 to 48 Gray Scale Window Checker Line Checker MP el N NI oO ay A Number of lands Area value 01 to 96 01 to 48 Average gray value X coordinate Binary Edge 01 to 96 Y coordinate Checker 01 to 48 X axis projection distance Y axis projection distance Number of detections Nth X coordinate Nth Y coordinate Nth X axis projection distance Gray Scale 01 to 96 Edge Checker 01 to 48 011099 Nth Y axis projection distance Number of detections Nth area value Nth center of gravity X coordinate Nth center of gravity Y coordinate Nth projection width X Nth projection width Y Nth perimeter length Feature 01 to 96 Extraction 01 to 48 01 to 99 Nth main axis angle Nth X axis projection di
23. Output Refer to threshold value Response to refer ence input Change threshold p value Output Change complete Input Output Matching checker No Re registrationtiming Switching complete Specification of Smart IN1 to 7 Smart Matching checker No IN8 Re registrationtiming Confirm by RDY READY signal off to on transition 16 37 16 38 K 2 n CR 01 to 96 K n nCR 22 01 to 96 16 50 16 50 G n n CR 22 01 to 96 16 51 G n nCR 22 01 to 96 16 51 Numerical calculation Input Refer to max and min limits Output Response to refer ence Input Change max and min limits Output Change complete F CR 01 to 96 16 52 F n nCR 22 01 to 96 16 52 N n nCR 22 01 to 96 16 53 N n nCR 22 01 to 96 16 53 Specification of X CR Input Product No to switch IN1 to 6 TYPE 16 32 22 01 to 64 16 32 to switching timing we Confirm by RDY Y 2C Output Switching complete READY signal offto 16 32 7 nR 16 32 on transition 01 to 64 Save Type Data Input Save data instruction Output Save complete MCR 16 34 MCR 16 34 16 6 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 1 Communi
24. Slice LevelVaAlues nd nee ee eke ave leere 16 48 16 9 1 Items related to serial communication 16 48 16 9 2 Referencing the maximum and minimum values 16 48 16 9 3 Changing the maximum and minimum values 16 49 16 10Referencing and Changing Gray Scale Edge Threshold Values 0 00 cece seen 16 50 16 10 1 Items related to serial communication 16 50 16 10 2 Referencing the threshold value 0 00 eee eee 16 50 16 10 38 Changing the threshold value 0 cece eee 16 51 16 11 Referencing and Changing Maximum Minimum Numerical Calculation Values 222222 essen nennen 16 52 16 11 1 Items related to serial communication 16 52 16 11 2 Referencing the maximum and minimum values 16 52 16 11 3 Changing the maximum and minimum value 16 53 vii Table of Contents Multichecker A210 A110 16 12 Key EMUl le 4 aaa eat nia a ee rl 16 54 16 12 1 Items related to serial parallel communications 16 54 16 12 2 Communication Settings 0 06 c nennen nenn 16 54 16 12 3 Serial Commands u 2 naar 16 55 16 13Computer Link e065 5045 24er ek 16 56 18 18 1 Dune ee eier ae Bee 16 56 16 13 2 Connection to a PLC 2 ne ri 16 57 16 13 3 Communication 2 45 an a ea 16 59 16 13 4 Communication Settings 006 c sense een nenn 16
25. Up to 256 edges can be detected However only up to 99 gray scale edge checkers can be used for numerical calculation You can set up to 96 checkers per type for the A210 and up to 48 per type for the A110 10 1 1 Menu Screen TYPE 1 35 GRAY EDGE DETECTION Ho 1 Jud HG Detected 1 Select Camera 2 Checker Setting Detected Judgnent 256 Pos Rot Adj Group 0 Result Copy Checker Delete Checker No Checker No Set the number of the gray scale edge checker to be created 1 Select Camera Select which camera A or B will supply the image on which the gray scale edge checker is to be activated This is fixed at A in the case of the A110 2 Checker Setting Set the checking area and set parameters etc 3 Detected Judgment Set the upper and lower limits for the number of edges detected by the gray scale edge checker and perform judgment based on those limits 4 Positon and Rotation Adjustment Group Set which position and rotation adjuster will adjust the gray scale edge checker being created 5 Result Display result information for up to 99 detected edges 6 Copy Checker When creating a checker copy the data from an existing checker 7 Delete Checker Delete the checker Gray Scale Edge Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 10 1 Gray Scale Edge Checkers 10 1 2 Checker Setting Set the gray checking area and set parameters etc TYPE 1 35 GRAY EDGE DETECTION No
26. You can set up to 96 registers for the A210 and up to 48 registers for the A110 Only 8 registers can be shown on screen at a time but the screen can be scrolled with the cursor lever i Note The judgment results set in JRO1 to JR96 JRO1 to JR48 for the A110 are not externally output With Autom Switch Automatic Switch mode the Block 1 results A210 JD01 to JD32 A110 JDO1 to JD16 cannot be externally output 2 Judgment Displays the judgment result for the set judgment conditions OK NG or ER 3 Judgment conditions program Displays the judgment conditions program that has been set The judgment conditions program can be up to 90 characters in length 13 23 Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 13 4 Judgment Output A Start Press A to capture an image The image is then inspected and depending on the I O settings the judgment result signal is output on the parallel or serial interface i Note In screens that display A Start external start signals can also be accepted B Copy When you are creating a program it is possible to copy a program set in another register an use it Judgment output menu The judgment output menu includes the following contents PA EA BW GW BE GE FE SM CA OCA JR JD Ope CHECKER 1 Item Dot Count Checker register PA position and rotation adjuster FE feature extractor EA exposure adjuster SM smart matching in the case of the A210 LI line
27. mw See 2 13 Filter Setup for details on filters Deviation Set whether or not to perform deviation processing To perform deviation processing the subtraction processing must be set to execute Yes If the Imagechecker is not set to perform deviation processing deviation data cannot be updated restored or reset 12 10 Multichecker A210 A110 Smart Matching 12 1 Smart Matching Subtraction processing Performs subtraction processing on the points detected by the matching checker The results are output as the area of the portion where the search image and template images do not match It overlaps the search image and the template image at the detected points and processes them as follows The Imagechecker calculates the difference in brightness between the search image f x y and the template g x y If the absolute value of the difference is larger than the threshold level th the result will be 1 if it is smaller the result will be 0 It will search for the number of pixels where the result is 1 to find the area size S of the differential and will output that number as the result It can perform the same filter processing as other binary checkers on pixels where the result is 1 Template Search image Difference calculation Difference 64 Difference 128 banede en Binarization Difference 0 Threshold level 96 Subtraction results Final results 12 11 Smart Matchin
28. 3 CHECKER Upper level menu E 2 SLICE LEYEL 2 EXPOSURE ADJ 3 INSPECTION CHECKER e 3 CHECKER 4 GROUP HOVE 4 SPREADSHEETS 5 NUMERICAL CALCULATION are 6 An x is automatically set in the T JUDGMENT upper level menu IMAGE DATA EIRE EEIE If you attempt to clear the x in the upper level menu the following message will be displayed ALI menu at lower layer hidden Also if you select from an upper level menu for which all lower level menu settings are set to Hide the following message is displayed and selection is not possible TYPE 1 3 CHECKER 15 13 Useful Functions Multichecker A210 A110 15 3 Hide Setting 15 3 3 Initializing Hide Setting Information Procedure 1 Select Initialization and the following screen appears 1 EXECUTION 2 pee 3 CHANGE PASSHORD r i Conp leted Please input password Enter the password and you will be asked whether you want to perform an initialization Execute initialization OK YES il Press Yes to initialize settings Press No to abort initialization If you initialize settings all hide settings are canceled and all of the menus will be displayed 15 14 Multichecker A210 A110 Useful Functions 15 3 Hide Setting 15 3 4 Changing Password 1 Select Change Password and the following message appears i EXECUTION 2 INITIALIZATION SIECHANGE PrSSHORD Conpleted Please input passwo
29. 4 Base Pos Execute a test to register the base point for adjustment 5 Pos Rot Adj Group Set which checker is to be used for adjustment in the case that you are using multiple settings for position and rotation adjustment Select a group number wm Refer to 4 4 Position Adjustment Groups for details 6 Delete Checker Use this to delete a checker eS Note If you delete a Position Adjustment Checker the inspection results for all checkers that follow the deleted checker are cleared Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 4 Make the Checker settings Select Checker Setting to display the checker setting menu 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 Feat Extr One Chkr Rot 2 AGEA 21 Shape Rect 206 200 305 279 White Object Object Area lt 245760 Filter Sorting Sorting Order Des Labeling Boundary ON OFF Shape The shape is fixed at Rect rectangle and cannot be changed Area Use this to move and set the checker area Object Select whether black or white pixels within the object area are to be processed Object Area Set upper and lower limits The region within this range is treated as the object for inspection The setting range for both the upper and lower limits is 1 to 245760 Filter Select whether or not to perform image erosion or dilation Sorting
30. Adj Group Set which checker is to be used for adjustment in the case that you are using multiple settings for position and rotation adjustment Select a group number w Refer to 4 4 Position Adjustment Groups for details 7 Delete Checker Use this to delete a checker In the case that you have created both vertical and horizontal checkers select which one you want to delete IE Note If you delete a Position Adjustment Checker the inspection results for all checkers that follow the deleted checker are cleared Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 4 Next perform the checker settings Select either Checker 1 or Checker 2 The setting procedure is the same for both checkers Here we will use Checker 1 as an example so select Checker 1 to display the Checker 1 setting menu 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 Binary Edge Hor Det Rot 12 Checker1 el Plane Area 206 200 305 279 Edge Condition Both Filter 3 Width 5 21 Shape 22 Area 23 Edge Condition 24 Filter 25 Width Set each of the items w For details regarding the settings refer to 9 Binary Edge Checkers This same menu is displayed when you select Checker 2 5 Set and confirm the Slice Level No Set and confirm the Slice Level No for the base checker Slice Level No A Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 3 Setting a
31. Select whether or not to sort the detected regions in order of area center X coordinate or center Y coordinate Sorting Order Select whether the result outputs are to be sorted in ascending or descending order Labeling Boundary Labeling This function recognizes individual target objects in the case that multiple target objects exist ON Recognizes individual target objects OFF Recognizes one target object even if there are multiple target objects Boundary This is used to set whether target objects that contact the lines of a region are to be inspected or not ON Inspect OFF Ignore Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 3 Multichecker A210 A110 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker w For details regarding the Labeling and Boundary functions refer to 11 Feature Extraction Select from among the following three combinations Labeling Boundary OFF ON ON OFF ON ON re Note 5 In the case of Two Checker Rotation Adjustment Checker 1 and Checker 2 are displayed The menu screens are the same as above Set and confirm the Slice Level No Set and confirm the Slice Level No for the base checker Slice Level No A Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 6 Set the base position Select and confirm the Base Pos Press A to display the current detection coordinates detection an
32. Trap function T If you execute an inspection from the main menu and a judgment register that has a trap set for it becomes NG the execution depends on the following two settings 1 When the Trap function is set by the judgment the READY signal is held at the OFF level even after inspection is finished and the following message is displayed Because the READY signal is off the START signal is not accepted and the next inspection is not performed Stopped by the trap condition Push B key to release At this time the only way to return to the state where the next inspection can be performed is to press B 2 If Save Image Data in the Environment menu is also set for the Trap function in addition to the settings for 1 the memory image at the time the NG occurs is stored rm See 15 1 Loading and Storing Image Data for details Unlike 1 the READY signal stays on so it is possible to continue performing inspections after a NG is generated NG Display function If you execute an inspection from the main menu and when the result of the specified judgment output is NG this function just displays the image This is done if you have set an N NG indicator in the judgment register and Gray NG for the display image This cannot be used when the capture camera is set to AB When the conditions for a judgment register that has an N NG Display set for it become NG the image is displayed on the monitor and subseque
33. atan x 10000 x 100 root x1 x 10000 T distance x 1 x 10000 Order of Priority of Operators Operators are executed in the following order of priority from highest to lowest priority High 6 amp T D Low Note on incorporation of efficient of conversion data into the calculation When coefficient of conversion data is incorporate into a calculation the A210 actually performs calculation as follows CA01 A CV11 A Base distance Base pixels In the calculation above if A Base distance exceeds the values that can be used for the numeric calculation 2 to 291 1 an ERROR signal will be output This is because overflow error occurs and the numeric calculation is not performed properly Base distance of less than 9999999 7 digits can be set as conversion data but in this case if A in the calculation above is substituted with more than 215 the calculation result will exceed 231 231_1 Therefore if the data multiplied by a coefficient calculation results of the numeric calculation prior to incorporation of conversion data provably exceed 215 adjust the number of base distance of conversion data to avoid an overflow error when the conversion data are incorporated into the numeric calculation above 13 20 Multichecker A210 A110 Optional Memory 13 3 Numerical Calculation 13 3 4 Symbols Used by Numerical Calculation programs
34. checker execution PCp Image capture checker execution specific substitution RCp Checker execution reinspect 16 22 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 4 Inspection Execution and Result Output Procedures Execution mode User Defined S Cp Block No 1 to 3 a P Ch Block No 1 to 3 ae ead as for Execute All R Cp Block No 1 to 3 3 The following commands are output only in the case that the Serial Output Setting is set to Output RCR Output timing After completion of image capture EC Output timing After completion of inspection and before result output output immediately before the result data Inspection result output example The output format of the results changes depending on the settings in item 53 Serial Output Inspection result example JDO1 ON JD02 OFF CA01 2513 CA02 325 CA03 15 CA04 98 Serial output setting example 1 7 ENVIRONMENT 153 EEHEIKSIN FINN 531 Outpuf 4Colum 1 11 gt 1 0 2513 325 15 98 R 532 Inval Digit Del 533 Read End None If an error occurs with the numerical 534 Process End None a ites 535 Numerical Calc Output calculation an e is output 536 Judgment Output Example 1 0 2513 e 15 98CR Serial output setting example 2 7 ENVIRONMENT 53 Sure ttt p 1 0 2513 0325 015 0098C p 4Colum 1 11 532 Inval Digit Repl 0 1 on AOE GADS CAOS 533
35. set the number of the position adjustment group to be used by highlighting the group number The initial value for the group number is 0 EF Notes If you are going to carry out position adjustment followed by a further position adjustment be sure to set the group number i e the position adjustment number corresponding to the adjustment The position will not be adjusted if the group number is 0 If you are using nested position adjustments using a further position adjuster to act on the result of an earlier position adjuster make sure the earlier position adjustment number is lower than the later position adjustment number Position adjusters are executed in ascending number order i e the lowest number goes first This is why you need to ensure that earlier position adjusters have lower numbers Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 4 Position Adjustment Groups v Example 1 Checker areas R1 and R2 are both given position adjustment group No 1 G 1 as shown in Figure 1 Because both checkers use the same position adjustment group the whole workpiece can be inspected reliably with only a single position adjuster even if the workpiece is misaligned as shown in Figure 2 The dotted line rectangles indicate the areas inspected by the checkers Figure 1 Figure 2 iti Position Position j en adjustment adjustment 1 Movement R1 R2 R1 R2 G 1 G 1 G 1 G 1
36. so all data will be lost if the power is cut A stored image can be reloaded and displayed You can also set and run a checker on a loaded screen in memory screen TYPE 1 7 IMAGE DATA 1 LOAD IMAGE DATA SAVE IMAGE DATA 2 3 LOCK IMAGE DATA 4 RESET IMAGE DATA Useful Functions Multichecker A210 A110 15 1 Loading and Storing Image Data 15 1 1 Load Image Data Call up stored images When image data is loaded 30 reduced size 8 for the A110 screens are displayed Move the cursor over to load the desired image For the A21 0 7 IMAGE DATA 2 3 4 T a m11 0 1C 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Scan Times CA30 CA31 CA32 ai IMAGE DATA F OROOG Scan Times CA15 CA21 CA29 1 Image reduction display area 2 Displays the current image 3 Shows the index number of the image The smaller the number the older the image 4 This L marking will appear if the lock is set on the image 5 Shows the number of scans when the highlighted image was stored Will not be displayed when the cursor is highlighting the current image 6 When the screen indicated by the cursor is saved the result data in the numerical calculation register set for the Limit Condition is displayed however it is not displayed when the cursor is indicating the current image 15 4 Multichecker A210 A110 Useful Functions 15 1 Load
37. su deren ser 12 3 12 1 1 Menu Screen er 12 3 12 1 2 Checker Settings 12 4 12 1 3 Substraction Settings A210 only 12 10 12 1 4 Check Template z22222 12 15 12 1 5 Result u near ee a ES 12 16 12 2 Smart Matching Checker Setup 12 17 Smart Matching Multichecker A210 A110 12 2 Multichecker A210 A110 Smart Matching 12 1 Smart Matching 12 1 Smart Matching This function is called Smart Matching on the A210 and Matching on the A110 Inthis manual only the term Smart Matching is used The smart matching checker registers a pre set base image and detects images similar to that registered image called a template from the checker area The correlation value represents the degree of similarity to the template an image must have to be detected You can set up to 96 per type for the A210 and up to 48 per type for the A110 It is possible to re register template images using input from external equipment w Refer to 16 7 Template Smart matching Re registration 12 1 1 Menu Screen Multi Checker A200 Ver 1 2 TYPE 1 37 SMART MATCHING Jud NG MATCHING for the A110 Ho 1 Detected O 1 Select Conera F Subtraction Setting Substraction Setting Pos Rot Adj Group is not for the A110 Check Tenp late Copy Checker 4 5 6 Result 7 8 Delete Checker No Checker No Set the number of the matching checker to be created 1
38. white or black Select Land Filter from the menu and set the minimum width for a land Select Gap Filter from the menu and set the minimum gap between lands i Note Set the land filter and gap filter values to give the optimum land counts for the purposes of inspection 10 Select Filter from the menu and set the type of filter required 11 Press C to complete checker setup 12 Select Dot Judgment from the menu and set the conditions for number of dots Press A to run a test and refer to the dot count shown at the top of the screen when setting the upper and lower limits TYPE 1 31 LINE Jud Dot OK Cnt Ho 1 Jud Land OK Cnt 1 Select Canera A 2 Slice Level Ho A 3 Checker Setting 4 Judesent Land Ju Dot Judsnent Multichecker A210 A110 Line Checkers 6 2 Line Checker Setup 13 Select Land Judgment from the menu and set the conditions for number of lands Press A to run a test and refer to the land count shown at the top of the screen when setting the upper and lower limits TYPE 1 31 LINE Jud Dot OK Ho 1 Jud Land OK Select Canera Slice Level Ho Checker Setting Dot Judesert 5 ETENEE 6 Adj Gmi Hox 3 7 Copy Chi BE 8 Delete Unger 14 When required set position and rotation adjuster and exposure adjuster group numbers Line Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 6 2 Line Checker Setup 6 10 Chapter 7 7 1 Binary Window Checkers Binar
39. 1 Jud NG Detected 0 MMChecker Setting 21 22 23 Plane 22 Direction Hor 23 Scan Method Single 24 Area 206 200 305 279 25 Edge Condition Both 26 Edge Thres Value 50 27 Condition 28 Detect Position Plural Shape Select the shape for the checker area Direction Select the scanning direction for the checker being created This parameter is not displayed when line scanning is selected Scan Method Select the scan method for the checker being created This parameter is not displayed when line scanning is selected 10 4 Multichecker A210 A110 Gray Scale Edge Checkers 10 1 Gray Scale Edge Checkers gt N Point Scanning Method Two different scanning methods are supported for gray scale edge checkers Single and projection The default is single Single scanning is a method which is beneficial for detecting edges on workpieces where the edges are not straight lines degraded or rounded edges or uneven surfaces Projection scanning is a method which enables the reliable detection of edges that are present even if the surface of an object is rough the gray scale image is grainy and individual edges do not stand out Single scanning A method of edge detection where the inspection area is scanned horizontally for each individual pixel in the scanning direction Scanning is performed according to four parameters scan pitch filter width and average area and it is relat
40. 2 Checker Setting ner ar ch eee ne baa we dk 5 2 Exposure Adjustment Setup 0c cece eee eee eee 5 3 Example for Exposure Adjustment Setup 0000 c eee eee eee Chapter6 Line Checkers 61 Kine CHECKERS rt a a eh Dare see hats eh Dyes ayaa ees cada 6 1 1 Main Men As ae tat ae a tere aah ara lath reid ne he AE 6 2 Checker Selling su 34 ee re yet 6 3 Line Checker Setup res na ri Hecke Table of Contents Multichecker A210 A110 Chapter 7_ Binary Window Checkers 7 1 Binary Window Checkers 0 00 c eee eee een rennen nn 7 1 1 Main Men cin anean iy a Gt bat E E E S EEA ele 7 1 2 Checker Setting u en er deal 7 1 3 Select the Adjustment Group 6 0c nennen 7 2 Binary Window Checker Setup 00 cece eee eee eee eee Chapter8 Gray Scale Window Checkers 8 1 Gray Scale Window Checkers 0 0 cece eee e eee ee eeee 8 1 1 Mon Sheen aan en 8 1 2 Checker Setting na seiner ei 8 2 Gray Scale Window Checker Setup 0 0c cece Chapter 9 Binary Edge Checkers 9 1 Binary Edge Checkers 00 c cece eee ees 9 1 1 WRITS a RA care tote arenas ee ae singe 9 1 2 Checker Selling Hear 9 1 3 Select the Adjustment Group 02 cece eee eee eee 9 2 Binary Edge Checker Setup 000s eee cece eee eee eens 9 3 Restrictions on Binary Edge Checkers 0c eee eee eee Chapter 10 Gray Scale Edge Checkers 10 1 Gray S
41. 5 Type Switching 16 5 3 Type switching using serial communication The commands X01 R to X64CR are used for type switching in the case of the A110 the commands are X01 R to X32CR When type switching is performed normally Y Cp is returned as the response type number to switch to When the specified type number is not set type switching cannot be performed normally so ZCp is returned as the response Type switching is also executed when the specified type number is the same as the current type number Y Cp is returned 16 5 4 Type switching using parallel communication How to specify the type number Specify the value of the type number as being the actual type number minus 1 and store it as BIN data in IN1 to IN6 In the case of the A110 store it as BIN data in IN1 to IN5 Type number BIN data lookup table 16 32 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 5 Type Switching Timing chart Specify the type number as being the actual type number minus 1 and as BIN data Input data IN1 to IN6 Type OFF switching input er g TYPE Ne W OFF READY output ON READY gt Min Ready Off Time After setting the type number in the input data registers IN1 to IN6 set TYPE to on After TYPE goes on READY goes off and the type will switch Confirm that READY output has gone off and then switch
42. 537 Numerical calculation Judgment PLC Type lt PLC communication settings gt PLC system register settings COM port No 412 Communication mode No 413 Transmission format Data length Parity check Stop bits Stop code Start code No 412 Communication speed setting 16 13 Computer Link Computer link 9600 Odd 16 Out Out MEW FP Computer link 8 bit Odd 2 CR No STX 9600 Use the DIP switches to make the data length parity and stop bit settings for the FP2 CCU 16 63 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 13 Computer Link PLC data monitor Register Value ar No Hex Description Data Bit 15 lt q 3 BEO 1 00E1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 11 0 0 0 0 1 Judgment J D04 J DO1 2 04D2 The value 1234 is stored CA01 3 FFF4 The value 12 is stored Numeric CA02 4 0000 The value 0 is stored Calculation CA03 Not set 5 0038 The value 56 is stored CA04 Concept Four Judgment data are stored per word The data of JDO2 is not set but E is output because the data before and after JDO2 are set Only the data of Numeric Calculation that are set to output In the case where the data of CA01 CA02 or CA04 is out of the range between 32768 and 32767 0 is stored in the registers 2 to 5 When Data Type is set to 32 bit four Judgment data are stored per word as d
43. 6 Adj Group ahs 61 Pos Rot Adj Group 62 Expo Adj Group 7 Copy Checker 8 Delete Checker 32 BINARY 1 Select Camera WINDOW 2 Slice Level No gt P7 3 3 Checker Setting T 31 Shape 32 Area 33 Mask Shape 34 Mask Area 35 Object 36 Filter 4 Area Judgment 5 Adj Group TE 51 Pos Rot Adj Group 52 Expo Adj Group 6 Copy Checker 7 Delete Checker 33 GRAY 1 Select Camera WINDOW 2 Checker Setting 21 Shape gt P8 3 22 Area 23 Mask Shape 24 Mask Area 3 Average Judgment 4 Pos Rot Adj Group 5 Copy Checker 6 Delete Checker 34 BINARY EDGE 1 Select Camera DETECTION 2 Slice Level No P9 3 3 Checker Setting 7 31 Shape 32 Area 33 Direction 34 Edge Condition 35 Filter 36 Width 4 Adj Group 41 Pos Rot Adj Group 42 Expo Adj Group 5 Copy Checker 6 Delete Checker Next page Next page 21 4 Multichecker A210 A110 Menu Layout 21 1 Menu Layout 35 GRAY EDGE 1 Select Camera en 2 Checker Setting T 21 Shape gt u 22 Direction 23 Scan Method 24 Area 25 Edge Condition 26 Edge Thres Value 27 Condition 271 Scan Pitch 272 Filter 273 Width 274 Average Area 28 Detect Position 3 Detected Judgment 4 Pos Rot Adj Group 5 Result 6 Copy Checker 7 Delete Checker 36 FEATURE 1 Select Camera Be 2 Slice Level No 3 Checker Setting 7 31 Shape 32 Area 33 Mask Shape 34 Mask Area 35 Object 36 Condition 361 Labeling 362 Bound ary 363 Perim
44. A Camera A L A Camera A B Camera B A210 only B Camera B A210 only Gray Mem Binary Mem Fu ee A to F Slice levels A to F I A Camera A I A Camera A B Camera B A210 only B Camera B A210 only Gray NG Binary NG SE FA I A Camera A IL A to F Slice levels A to F B Camera B A210 only A Camera A B Camera B A210 only Multichecker A210 A110 Screens and Basic Operations 1 3 Main Screen Operations Gray Thru Binary Thru The image currently captured by the camera if you cover the camera lens with your hand the display will go dark Gray Memj Binary Mem An image that has previously been captured Inspections are performed using this memory image covering the lens does not change the image Gray NG Binary NG A captured image same as a memory image An image that was inspected and produced results that were outside the range of a certain setting condition i e NG No Good w Refer to 13 4 Judgment Output for details eS Note When Mem NG is selected if no image has been captured yet there will be no image in memory and nothing will be displayed when the power is switched on Screens and Basic Operations Multichecker A210 A110 1 3 Main Screen Operations 1 3 3 Changing Display Items Select the screen display items for the type that you have selected Use 6 Initial Display Settings in the Type menu to make the initial settings for when the power is switched on and when y
45. ABC 37 SHART MATCHING Jud HG Ho 1 Detected 0 MMChecker Setting 24 RT 41 Sorting Ho 242 Sorting Order 241 Sorting Select the method for sorting the data output conditions Data can be sorted by correlation value X coordinate or Y coordinate 242 Sorting Order Select whether to sort in ascending or descending order Smart Matching Multichecker A210 A110 12 1 Smart Matching 12 1 3 Substraction Settings A210 only Set the parameters for the subtraction settings TYPE 1 sABC 37 SHART HATCHING Jud HG 31 32 33 34 35 Ho 1 Detected 0 EMaSubtraction Setting Ho 32 Sub Area Judgment 245760 33 Thres Value 50 34 Filter Ho 35 Deviation Ho 36 Update Devi Data Initial ized 37 Put Devi Data back 38 Initialize Devi Data Subtraction Set whether or not to perform subtraction processing The items cannot be changed Subtracted Area Judgment Set the upper limit of the subtracted area value searched for in the subtraction processing and perform an OK NG judgment Threshold Value A threshold value is applied when converting the gray scale difference between the template and detected area into black and white The threshold value can be set in the range 0 to 255 Filter Once the gray scale image has been binarized it is possible to use various filters to effectively eliminate noise outside of the target image and to connect and separate objects
46. AY v Example 2 Keeping the same checker settings as example 1 two workpieces of different dimensions are inspected See how the position adjustment group number affects the result when the length of the workpiece varies A B 1 Inspection using only one group group No 1 G 1 Because only a single position adjustment is performed the position is only properly adjusted for one of the checkers The other checker does not inspect the correct position Position Position i adjustment 1 adjustment 1 R1 R2 R1 R2 G 1 G 1 G 1 G 1 Inspection error 4 61 Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 4 Position Adjustment Groups 2 Inspection using two separate groups group No 1 G 1 and No 2 G 2 Position adjustment is carried out independently for each checker so the checkers can move on both sides Position adjustment Position adjustment 2 1 Nass ee Ne io es ir Re Ka G 1 G 2 Position adjustment 1 gt Position adjustment 2 1 ij AY v Example 3 If the position adjustment group No is 0 no adjustment is performed and the checker always inspects the same position eS Note If you find that the position is not adjusted despite having defined position adjustment checkers the cause may be that the inspection checker still has its group number set to 0 Consider examples 1 and 2 and set the group n
47. DA DS a nn i Output signals I 1 I 1 3 Output ON Input signals iG aca CC Tae rye N Output OFF A Dutput BsHold mode C3Esc Forced output Press A Output and use the cursor lever to move the cursor to any of the output signals RDY Ready ERR Error REND STR Start OVF Over flow or D1 to D8 then press ENTER to turn the output for that signal ON OFF Input monitor The ON OFF status of input signals STA Start ACK TYPE and IN1 to IN8 can be monitored Press B to switch input status between Latch and Auto Latch When the input signal goes ON the display goes ON and remains ON when the input signal goes off again Auto The display only goes ON while the input signal is ON The Setting Help Tools Multichecker A210 A110 19 1 Use Setting Help Tools to Adjust Settings Before Inspecting 19 10 Chapter 20 Specifications 20 7 SPECHCAHONS 2 ee ea ee 20 3 Specifications Multichecker A210 A110 20 2 Multichecker A210 A110 Specifications 20 1 Specifications 20 1 Specifications A210 Multichecker V2 A110 Multichecker V2 CPU 32 bit RISC CPU high speed processing version 32 bit RISC CPU Frame memory 512 x 480 pixels x 256 gradations 512 x 480 pixels x 256 gradations Operator interface Menu selection by specialized keypad Change between gray scale memory gray scale through binary memory A B C D E F Montod
48. Edge Hor Det Rot 2 Checker 1 e Plane Area 206 200 305 279 Edge Condition Both Edge Thres Value 50 Scan Pitch 1 Filter 3 Width 5 Average Area 5 21 Shape 22 Area 23 Edge Condition 24 Edge Thres Value 25 Scan Pitch 26 Filter 27 Width 28 Average Area Set each of the items w For details regarding the settings refer to 10 Gray Scale Edge Checkers This same menu is displayed when you select Checker 2 Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 5 Set the base position wm Refer to Setting the base position on page 4 17 for details 1 POS ROT ADJ Jud NG nX No 1 Gray Edge Hor Det Rot 1 Select Camera 2 Checker 1 3 Checker 2 77 7 5 Pos Rot Adj Group 6 Delete Checker Im B Image Press the A Test key to display the current detection coordinates and angle 1 POS ROT ADJ Jud NG No 1 Gray Edge Hor Det Rot 1 Select Camera 2 Checker 1 3 Checker 2 Empty aoe amp 161 38 E ERED Detection coordinates Pos Rot Adj Group 6 Delete Checker angiangi B Image re Note Press the B Image key to check the base position using the image Press the ENTER key to register the displayed coordinates and angle as the base position The adjustment amounts AX AY and 4 0 are displayed at the top right of the screen 1 POS ROT ADJ Jud NG pos
49. NG data are all reset to zero 3 3 8 Deleting a Type Procedure 1 Set the type number to be deleted 2 Select Delete Type and press ENTER 3 Enter YES to delete when Delete is displayed Enter NO to go back without deleting eS Note When you delete a type the saved data including locked items is deleted Environment and Type Multichecker A210 A110 3 3 Types 3 3 9 Selecting Initial Display Settings For the current type select the initial settings for particular menus and display items The settings made here are used for the display when the controller power is turned on mw Refer to 1 3 3 Changing Display Items for details Procedure 1 Set and confirm the type number for setting the initial display 2 Select and confirm 6 Initial Display Settings TYPE 1 1 TYPE Rest No 1 A Menu Setting 61 Screen Displa Main Menu 62 Checker Pattern Response 63 Make Bright at NG No 64 Detect Position On 65 Status Display Time 66 Marker On 3 Select the item that you want to set and confirm your selection to display the selection menus mw Refer to 1 3 3 Changing Display Items for details Use the cursor lever to select the display items 61 Screen Display _ Off Main Menu Data Monitor Checker List Spreadsheets Select the one that you want to display 62 Checker Pattern _ Off Fixed Display at the set position
50. NG operation not set J A button A button E i Ec T Trap function set J A button ECEE N NG display function set 4 Press A again and the N will disappear This cancels the setting A Example Judgment with Different Judgment Conditions The table below shows examples of judgement with different judgment conditions Judgment Judgment Judgment Judgment Judgment result is ER if the judgment register could not be referenced Order of priority of operators is as follows High J low 13 30 Multichecker A210 A110 Optional Memory 13 4 Judgment Output 13 4 3 Restrictions Applying to Judgments 1 Order of use of JR and JD registers judgment output registers If the result of judgment in a JR or JD register is to be used by another register the register being used needs to be set earlier than the register using it Calculations on CA registers are carried out in ascending order of register number Also it is not possible to reference a JD register with a JR register A d Example Correct JDO1 PA01 PA02 JD02 JD01 PA02 Incorrect JD01 JD02 PA02 JD02 PA01 PA02 2 Number of terms in a program A single program can have up to 90 characters and up to a maximum of 16 terms 3 Conditions for using NOT NOT cannot be specified with braces N a Example Correct PAO1 Incorrect PA01 PA01 PAO2
51. Point Edge condition Detection direction horizontal Detection direction vertical Starting point Scan direction Dark light Light dark Both Finishing point N Scan direction Detected Detected Detected Dark light Light dark Both Detected Detected Detected J Finishing point 26 Edge Threshold Value Set the edge threshold values for the checker being created A gray scale edge checker performs differential processing on a gray scale image to detect edges Changes in brightness of the gray scale image are processed as differential data After processing the data can be represented as a graph with peaks like those shown in the diagram When the graph slants upwards the gray scale level is changing from dark to light The dotted line on the vertical axis of this graph is the threshold value expressed in 256 gradation gray scale Only peaks which reach the threshold value are detected as edges Set the threshold value with reference to the differential values of the edges so that only the required edges are detected 10 6 Multichecker A210 A110 Gray Scale Edge Checkers 10 1 Gray Scale Edge Checkers Detected Light Threshold 0 Threshold Dark 27 Condition Set the processing conditions for the checker being created TYPE 1 5 GRAY EDGE DETECTION Ho 1 Jud HG Detected 0O AMMChecker Setting 27 Kal EAN 71 Scan Pitch 272 Filter 2
52. Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 6 Set the base position rw Refer to Setting the Base Position on page 4 17 for details 1 POS ROT ADJ Jud NG No 1 Binary Edge Hor Det Rot 1 Select Camera 2 Checker1 3 _Checker2 4 TER Sore 5 Pos Rot Adj Group 6 Delete Checker A Test B Image Press the A Test key to display the current detection coordinates and angle 1 POS ROT ADJ Jud NG No 1 Binary Edge Hor Det Rot 1 Select Camera 2 Checkerl 3 Checker2 Base Pos 61 3938 0489 3 Detection coordinates 5 Pos Rot Adj Group 0 d 6 Delete Checker and angle A Test B Image eS Note Press the B Image key to check the base position using the image Press the ENTER key to register the displayed coordinates and angle as the base position The adjustment amounts AX AY and AB are displayed at the top right of the screen 1 POS ROT ADJ Jud NG nX 0 No 1 nY 0 m Adjustment amounts Binary Edge Hor Det Rot n8 0 0 1 Select Camera Checker1 Checker2 2 3 A 61 3 38 0 89 3 5 Pos Rot Adj Group 0 6 Delete Checker A Test B Image Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 4 3 3 Setting a Position Adjustment Checker that uses Gray Scale Edge Detection This explains how to use a Gray Scale Edge checker as an adjustment checker If you are unfamiliar with the operation o
53. Rot 2 AGEA 21 Shape Rect 206 200 305 279 White Object Object Area lt 245760 Filter Sorting Sorting Order Des Labeling Boundary ON OFF Shape The shape is fixed at Rect rectangle and cannot be changed Area Use this to move and set the checker area Object Select whether black or white pixels within the object area are to be processed Object Area Set upper and lower limits The region within this range is treated as the object for inspection The setting range for both the upper and lower limits is 1 to 245760 Filter Select whether or not to perform image erosion or dilation Sorting Select whether or not to sort the detected regions in order of area center X coordinate or center Y coordinate Sorting Order Select whether the result outputs are to be sorted in ascending or descending order Labeling Boundary Labeling This function recognizes individual target objects in the case that multiple target objects exist ON Recognizes individual target objects OFF Recognizes one target object even if there are multiple target objects Boundary This is used to set whether target objects that contact the lines of a region are to be inspected or not ON Inspect OFF Ignore Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker rm For details regarding the Labeling and Boundary functions refer to 17 Feature Extraction Select from among
54. Sine Cosine Arctangent Root Distance between points Projection X Y axis Special substitutions Reference to previous data Output control Judgement output External output D register 96 type max Internal judgement R register 96 type max External output D register 48 type max Internal judgement R register 48 type max 20 3 Specifications Multichecker A210 A110 20 1 Specifications A210 Multichecker V2 A110 Multichecker V2 External interface Serial RS232C 2ch max 115200bps Matsushita Electric Works PLC FP series CCU compatible Compatible with Mitsubishi A FX Series PLC Omron C Series PLC and Allen Bradley PLC Parallel Input 11 points Output 14 points Removable screw down terminal block Inspection start Image trigger timing sensor unnecessary External sensor timing Repeat start Display item suppressing function menu display hide function Image suppress function when setting checkers Image rotation function when setting checkers A210 Oth er Display functions Clearly display reject location Rotational adjustment angle display A210 specifica Numerical calculations results display Image filtering display function tions Accumulated data display Display list of checkers Veer uian 8 graphics line rectangle or ellipse type max can be registered for display on the main screen i i 30 screens 8 screens mage
55. WARNING A handling error could cause serious physical injury to an operator and in the worst case could even be fatal CAUTION A handling error could cause serious physical injury to an operator or damage to the equipment WARNING Always take precautions to ensure the overall safety of your system so that the whole system remains safe in the event of failure of this product or other external factor Do not use this product in areas with inflammable gas It could lead to an explosion CAUTION To prevent abnormal exothermic heat or smoke generation use this product at the values less than the maximum of the characteristics and performance that are assured in these specifications Do not dismantle or remodel the product It could lead to abnormal exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not touch the terminal while turning on electricity It could lead to an electric shock Do not allow foreign matters such as liquid flammable materials metals to go into the inside of the product It might cause exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not undertake construction such as connection and disconnection while the power supply is on Connect the wires or connectors securely The loose connection might cause abnormal exothermic heat or smoke generation GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Installation Environment Avoid using the Micro Imagechecker A210 A110 in the following types of locations Locations with direct sunlight or
56. When switching types and Start Type is set to Last store type No but Display message is set off Press ENTER at Save Data and all the changes made up to that point are saved There is no need to save the data every time a change is made but make sure to save the data before turning the power off if any settings or changes have been made The message shown above is no longer displayed when you save data Save the changed Data YES E Li If you select Yes when the above message is being displayed the data will be saved If you select NO or press C the process will be abandoned The following message is displayed when the data save is in progress Do not use the keypad serial or parallel communications or cut the power while this message is on the screen How Saving Please wait about one ninute Doing so may cause not only the loss of the data but may damage the system or prevent it from starting up The amount of time required to save data depends on the amount of data A small amount of data can be saved quickly but if there is a lot of data saving may take up to a minute Save Data Multichecker A210 A110 14 1 Save Data I Note The following data is not saved in the F ROM when data is saved Images saved using the SAVE DATA menu Results of executing checkers judgments detection values Results of calculations specified for specific substitution of numerical calculat
57. area ofthe specified colour of pixels detected in the inspection area set the upper and lower limits to be used for OK NG judgment 5 Adjustment Group Set which adjustment checker will adjust the binary window checker to be created 6 Copy Checker When creating a checker copy the data from an existing checker 7 Delete Checker Delete the checker Binary Window Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 7 1 Binary Window Checkers Judgment If the area size value detected is within the upper and lower limits of the area size value judgment conditions the judgment is OK but if it exceeds the limits the judgment is NG An NG judgmentis also given if the binary window checker moves outside the screen area in compliance with the position and rotation adjustment or if the position and rotation adjuster generates an error Area The area size detected is displayed Units are single pixels Multichec ker A210 A110 Binary Window Checkers 7 1 2 7 1 Checker Settings Create the binary window checker and set parameters etc 31 32 33 34 35 36 7 1 3 TYPE i 32 BINARY HINDOM Jud HG Ho 1 Area 0 EMMMChecker Setting B z Rect 32 Area 206 200 305 279 33 Hask Shape 34 Mask Area 3 35 Object 36 Filter Shape Select the shape for the checker area Area Create or move the checker area Mask Shape Select the shape for the mask area Mask Area Create
58. area setting cannot be made without modification Move the area to the centre of the screen before setting the area again Area setting image display 1 Binary checker with filtering specified The filtered image is displayed 2 Binary checker adjusted with an exposure adjuster An image with the adjusted binarization level is displayed If the conditions in 1 and 2 are satisfied the image is displayed with all those conditions present Multichecker A210 A110 Inspection Procedure 2 11 Checker Area and Marker Area Setting Method 2 11 Checker Area and Marker Area Setting Method 2 11 1 Rectangle circle oval Press ENTER to switch between Move all Move start point Move end point and Fix Press C to go in the opposite direction Use the cursor lever to move the whole area the start point and the end point Move all ae start point Move end point ENTER JENTER ENTER Fix 2 11 2 Arc Press ENTER to switch between Move all Move start point Move end point Move arc start point Move arc end point and Fix Press C to go in the opposite direction Use the cursor lever to move the whole area the start point and the end point Move all Move start point Move end point A Ca ENTER ENTER Z x c c q eS Notes When the start point or end point is moved the shape is automatically converted to from an arc to a circle Move arc start point Move arc end point ENTER ENTER Fix Cc
59. ee ea ake 15 11 18 3 1 Hide Selling ers usssnseseus eigenen 15 11 15 3 2 Entering Hide Settings Mode cee eee eee 15 12 15 3 3 Initializing Hide Setting Information 55 15 14 15 3 4 Changing Password rasen sn ieee gan ees 15 15 15 4 Executing a Group Move 0 cece eee eee 15 16 Chapter 16 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 1 Communications Function 2 0 08 eee we heen ee een aan se Rete 16 5 16 2 Communication Settings 0 nennen nennen nennen 16 8 16 2 1 The Communication Menu 0 cece eee 16 8 16 22 Com M de scout nal yon kei naw bas cewek ole yee a 16 9 16 237 R923920 ee St eda ye a ra Ba ee SEE 16 10 16 2 4 Serial Output Settings Normal Mode 45 16 12 16 2 5 Serial Output Settings Computer Link 16 13 16 2 6 Parallel Output Settings 00 cee nennen 16 14 vi Multichecker A210 A110 Table of Contents 16 3 16 4 16 5 16 6 16 7 16 8 16 9 Serial Parallel Communication Command Tables 16 17 16 3 1 Serial Command Table 0 c cece eee 16 17 16 3 2 Parallel Signal Allocation Table 0 00 eee eee eee 16 20 Inspection Execution and Result Output Procede Sassonia ee ou eae ee EE PAE ee 16 21 16 4 1 Items related to serial parallel communications 16 21 16 4 2 Inspection Using Serial Communications
60. fixed at A in the case of the A110 2 Checker Setting Creating the exposure adjuster and setting adjustment coefficient etc 3 Base Set the gray scale inside the area of the exposure adjuster The gray scale value base shades set is used as the reference value in order to obtain the amount of exposure adjustment 4 Average Judgment Set upper and lower limits to the average gray scale value obtained and evaluate the value with regard to the limits OK if the average is within the range of the upper and lower limits but NG if it exceeds the range 5 Position and Rotation Adjustment Group Specify which position and rotation adjuster the exposure adjuster to be created will be adjusted by 6 Copy Checker When creating a checker copy the data from an existing checker Exposure Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 5 1 Exposure Adjustment 7 Delete Checker Delete the checker eae Note If the exposure adjuster is deleted the exposure adjustment group of the adjusted side of the checker will automatically revert to 0 exposure adjustment will not be executed Average Shows the average value of the brightness data within the set area Correlation Value Corr Value Difference between the average gray scale value taken into the gray memory when the exposure adjustment checker executes and the value set as the reference gray scale value Multichecker A210 A110 Exposure Adjustment 5 1 2 5 1 Exposu
61. following message appears Tmage data is exist Delete unlock image data YES Select Yes to delete all unlocked images Select No to abort deletion 15 1 5 Conditions for deleting image data When the processes listed below are performed all images are cleared including locked images Power off Change camera mode camera setting Change the Save Image Data setting Delete Initialize Copy type Initialize the environment settings Switch the capture camera setting to a different type 15 6 Multichecker A210 A110 Useful Functions 15 1 Loading and Storing Image Data 15 1 6 Hints for restoring images using VBT Ver 2 Vision Backup Tool Ver 2 When restoring images using VBT Ver 2 Vision Backup Tool Ver 2 there is no distinction between cameras 1 and 2 or between cameras A and B It is possible to restore the type of camera 2 to the type of camera 1 Consequently discrepancies may arise between the index display and the camera link under the following conditions When the type of camera 2 is restored to the type of current camera 1 When the type of camera 1 is restored to the type of current camera 2 When the type of camera 1 B is restored to the type of current camera 1 A When the type of camera 1 A is restored to the type of current camera 1 B If discrepancies arise either Do not upload a type that has different camera connection information or Delete all images stored
62. for an image from a camera other than that set for the capture camera The capacity was exceeded You attempted to register an image without features Execution position You specified a non existent checker The specified checker number is set for an image from a camera other than that set for the capture camera The result of number of detected objects from execution of the smart matching checker was 0 Adjustment position You specified a non existent checker The specified checker number is set for an image from a camera other than that set for the capture camera Execution of position adjustment resulted in part of the template area protruding off the screen 16 40 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 7 Template Smart matching Re registration Execution Position Adjustment Position Re registration Area Display Re registration execution when set to Yes second IN8 input Error example Template No IN1 to IN7 OFF Ready signal READY ON Template IN8 OFF re registration 4 fi input oA Error signal ERROR OFF ON The ERROR signal output conditions are as follows Execution Position Adjustment Position The capacity was exceeded You attempted to register an image without features 16 41 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 7 Template Smart matching Re registration 16 7 4 Notes Re
63. is required See items 5411 to 5414 as well 5411 Timeout To In the case that handshaking will be performed this sets the maximum time to wait for the confirmation ACK signal from the external device in response to a signal output by the Imagechecker The timeout can be set in the range from 20ms to 20000ms in 1ms steps 5412 Delay Time Td This sets a delay between the ACK signal and the STROB signal in order to prevent chattering during handshaking The delay time can be set in the range from 300us to 20000us in 100us increments 5413 Numerical Calculation Select whether or not to output the results of numerical calculation in the case that When handshaking is being performed If you want to output numerical calculation data select 8 bit 16 bit or 32 bit as the output data length from the Numerical Calculation menu wm Refer to 13 3 Numerical Calculation for details 16 14 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 2 Communication Settings 5414 Judgment ip Note 542 543 Select whether or not to output judgment results if handshaking is being performed If you will use handshaking it is not possible to set both 5413 Numerical Calc and 5414 Output for no output One of the two must be set for output Reset Cond Select one of the following three methods for resetting the parallel output data Latch factory setting Hold until output of the next inspection resu
64. length for the output data to either 16 or 32 bits Numerical Calculation Set whether or not to output the numerical calculation results Judgment Set whether or not to output the judgment results PLC Type Set the PLC type Matsushita Electric Works PLC FP Series and models from some other manufacturers are available If the number of digits in the output data exceeds the setting for the number of output digits the Imagechecker will output the OVF overflow signal and will output the required portion of data as zeros Be sure to monitor the OVF signal 16 13 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 2 Communication Settings 16 2 6 Parallel Output Settings Perform the following settings in order use parallel communication Select the data to be output Select the data output and reset methods Select the methods for re registering the Smart Matching template and for switching the camera 7 ENVIRONMENT 154 Parallel Output 541 Handshake Yes 5411 Timeout 5000ms 5412 Delay Time 300us 5413 Numerical Calc None 5414 Judgment Out 542 Reset Cond Latch 543 Setting Template No 544 Disp Img Change Easy Mode 541 Handshake In the case of output from JDO1 to JDO8 only Select No there is no need for handshaking In the case of output from JDO9 and subsequent registers and numerical calculation results in addition to JDO1 to JDO8 Select Yes handshaking
65. maximum CR ICH to External device Modification complete command Output when modification of the gray scale edge threshold value is completed normally N minimum maximum Cr External device to ICH Change command for nu merical calculation maxi mum and minimum values Changes the maximum and minimum values for a numerical calculation Register numbers are 01 to 96 01 to 48 for the A110 N minimum maximum R F22CR ICH to External device External device to ICH Change complete com mand for numerical cal culation maximum and minimum values Reference command for numerical calculation maximum and minimum values Output when change of the maximum and mini mum values for a numerical calculation was completed normally References the maximum and minimum values for a numerical calculation Register numbers are 01 to 96 01 to 48 for the A110 F minimum maximum Cr ICH to External device Notification command for numerical calculation maximum and minimum values Output as a reply to the Reference command for numerical calculation maximum and minimum values 1 Cp 0 to 3 External device to ICH Camerachangecommand Changes the display camera l CR ICH to External device Camera change complete command Output when change of the camera was com pleted normally Q Cr 1 External device to ICH Spreadsheets data rese
66. maximum and minimum values so that they cannot be changed from the Data Monitor Press A with the register highlighted to lock the setting values an L will be displayed to the left of the item To unlock press A again L lt B Delete gt Press ENTER with the register highlighted to delete a display item then press B Editing display item titles Use the following procedure to edit the titles of display items Procedure 1 Align the cursor with the item that you want to change and press ENTER to display the register selection window 2 Use the cursor lever to select and confirm Title Title CA OCA JR JD 3 The title input window will appear Edit the title in the same way as you would input a new title 13 40 Multichecker A210 A110 Optional Memory 13 7 Checker List 13 7 Checker List This function displays the operational status of checkers in a list and allows you to verify the set checkers their numbers and their results at a glance Set the main screen display to Checker List refer to 1 3 3 Changing Display Items and 3 3 9 Selecting Initial Display Settings for details 32 status items are displayed for each checker as shown in the diagram below l Setting complete the current result is OK 0 Setting complete the current result is NG E Setting complete the current result is error Not set Page1 2 Page lt Number Type No 33 to 64 and No 56 to 96 lt
67. move Group move only applies to checkers of a type specified as Yes Group move does not apply to checkers of a type specified as No If necessary press A to capture an image Select the position and rotation adjustment group number for the checkers to be moved The number entered represents the appropriate position and rotation adjustment group The checkers corresponding to the number entered are displayed brightly i Note Position and rotation adjusters cannot be move by Group Move 15 16 Multichecker A210 A110 Useful Functions 15 4 Executing a Group Move 4 Select the types of checkers to be moved Set independently for each type of checker whether or not it should be included in a group move The types of checkers included in a group move are displayed brightly 5 Press A to start the group move Images with rotation angle O are displayed during a group move Use the cursor lever to move the checkers to the required position 6 Press ENTER to complete the group move eS Notes All results are cleared for checkers which have been group moved Since the position the checkers are moved to becomes the execution position for the next inspection the amount of adjustment may prevent a checker from being set within the screen A situation where the setting position cannot be set within the screen In this situation an Position is out of image range error message is displayed If this error occur
68. of five 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 Matching Theta Rot 3 Base Position No Co X Go Theta Cone 531 sosa 00 om 2 A Test B Pos Dsp C Esc Select the appropriate position from the table and press the ENTER key The coordinates that you select are registered as the base position When you return to the setting menu the adjustment amounts AX AY and 490 are displayed at the top right of the screen Press the B key to check the base position using the image Press the C key to cancel the base position rm Refer to Setting the base position on page 4 17 for details Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 4 3 10 Setting One Checker Rotation Adjustment and Two Checker Rotation Adjustment that uses Matching A210 only This explains how to use a Matching checker for adjustment If you are unfamiliar with the operation of Matching checkers read 12 Smart Matching One Checker Rotation Adjustment uses one checker and Two Checker Rotation Adjustment uses two checkers With Two Checker Rotation Adjustment there are two types of checker settings but the setting method for each is the same as that for One Checker Rotation Adjustment Procedure 1 Select the Position Rotation Adjustment Checker number TYPE 1 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 1 BINARY EDGE DETECTION 2 GRAY EDGE DETECTION 3 FEATURE EXTRACTION 4 MATCHING
69. outside the range set by the maximum and minimum values Set the Screen Data Save Condition in Environment to Limit Condition and set the limit conditions into the register mw Refer to page 13 18 Setting and Deleting a Limit Condition for details regarding how to set limit conditions into a register Gray scale edge mode The Detection No that can be referenced is restricted according to the Detect Position mode Front Only Detection No 1 can be specified Front Rear Only Detection No 1 and No 2 can be specified Peak Only Detection No 1 can be specified Plural Not restricted No 01 to 99 13 41 Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 13 3 Numerical Calculation Atan Root Distance Atan is denoted by and root is denoted by Atan and root can be utilized in calculations using ordinary calculation methods Parts of a program enclosed in brackets are evaluated with priority over the rest of the calculation For example in the program CA01 CA02 the part in the brackets is evaluated first A a Example The two coordinates of the locations in the diagram detected by a gray scale edge checker can be used with the Root Distance T and Atan functions to calculate the angle and the length of each side X1 YL a X2 Y2 Side a CA01 X2 X1 Side b CA02 Y2 Y1 Side c Using the Root function CA03 CA01 CA01 CA02 CA02 Pyth
70. program move the cursor to the sign of the register for which you want to set specific substitution and press ENTER to display the Condition window None Spec Subst Lim Cond Use the cursor lever to select Spec Subst and confirm the selection The sign will change to a sign This indicates that specific substitution is set To delete the specific substitution setting use the same procedure to cursor lever to display the Condition window select None and confirm the selection The sign will change back to the sign CA018GE02011 GE01011 CAO1HGE02011 GEO01011 Setting and Deleting a Limit Condition When creating a numerical calculation program move the cursor to the sign of the register for which you want to set limit conditions for holding the screen and press ENTER to display the Condition window None Spec Subst Use the cursor lever to select Limit Condition and confirm the selection The sign will change to a sign This indicates that limit condition is set To delete the limit condition setting use the same procedure to cursor lever to display the Condition window select None and confirm the selection The sign will change back to the sign CA018GE02011 GE01011 CA01i4 GE02011 GE01011 eS Note The maximum number of limit condition settings is three registers per type 13 18 Multichecker A210 A110 Optional Memory 13 3 Numerical Calculation 13 3 3 Restrictions Applyin
71. reference to the average gray scale values shown at the top of the screen ia Note The actual exposure adjustment is not affected by the average gray scale value being outside the range set for average gray scale judgment The average gray scale judgment conditions are used in judging the brightness of images taken into gray scale memory 7 Seta position and rotation adjustment group Exposure Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 5 3 Example for Exposure Adjustment Setup 5 3__Example for Exposure Adjustment Setup A 7 Example Performing reliable exposure adjustment using the image shown below Procedure 1 Set the binarization levels to give the optimum binary image for the object being inspected 2 Set an exposure adjuster on the area serving as a background to the workpiece or similar area If the average gray scale value judgment conditions are set at this point they can be used for judgment output when adjusting for variations of brightness in illumination etc Exposure adjustment checker Workpiece 3 Set the inspection checkers Exposure adjustment checker Workpiece Note In general the amount of adjustment is around 50 Large changes in exposure due to excessive variations in illumination etc In this case the following message will appear As a result of the Exposure Adjustment the slice level exceeds the range 0 to 255 or lower limit upper limit
72. set up to 96 checkers per type for the A210 and up to 48 per type for the A110 Area shapes and mask shapes can be either square circular or polygonal 8 1 1 Menu Screen TYPE i 33 GRAY HINDOH Jud HG Ho 1 Average A Checker Setting Average Judgment lt 255 Pos Rot Adj Group 0 Copy Checker Delete Checker 2 3 4 5 6 No Checker No Set the number ofthe gray scale window checker to be created 1 Select camera Select which camera A or B will supply the image on which the gray scale window checker is to be activated This is fixed at A in the case of the A110 2 Checker Setting Create the check area and set parameters etc 3 Average Judgment If the average gray scale value in the inspection area is within the upper and lower limits it is judged to be OK 1 The limits for average gray scale value judgment can be set in the range 0 to 255 The judgment results and average gray scale value value are displayed in the upper right portion of the screen Gray Scale Window Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 8 1 Gray Scale Window Checkers 4 Position and Rotation Adjustment Group Set which position and rotation adjuster will adjust the gray scale window checker 3 Aerage Judgnent lt 255 0 gt TM MPos Rot Adj Group 5 Copy Checker _ 5 Copy Checker When creating a checker copy the data from an existing checker 6 Delete Checker Delete the checker Judgment Shows whether or not
73. store Hecke Store load function for inspection image all screens problem screens a Store images for reinspection resetting Windows PC image store load function etup tools L Debugging Trap function Image store function Setup help Focus setup Aperture setup Lighting adjustment Gray scale profile monitor Recommended slice level display Input monitor Enforce output Moving object inspection Double speed random camera progressive flash electronic shutter used Camera support Double speed random camera progressive ANM831 Standard camera ANM832 Composite video NTSC input used however the connection requires one port Number of support cameras 2 1 Two camera vertical horizontal partition possible Operating voltage Setup data backup 24V DC less than 0 9A 24V DC less than 0 7A Setup data can be saved to a Windows PC using the Vision Backup Tool Ver 2 20 4 Chapter 21 21 1 Menu Layout Menu Layout Multichecker A210 A110 21 2 Multichecker A210 A110 Menu Layout 21 1 Menu Layout 21 1 Menu Layout 1 TYPE gt P3 18 Copy Type gt P3 24 Delete Type gt P3 25 Input Type Title P3 20 Capture Camera P3 21 Camera Image P3 22 oa AUN Display Settings 61 P3 14 62 63 64 65 66 7 Execution Mode Execute All gt P3 27 E Autom Switch User Defined 8 Initialize all Types gt P3 28 2 SLICE LEVEL A gt P2 16 B C D E F 3 CHECK
74. the Numerical Calculation settings and numbers subject to output control are skipped 2 Numerical data is output in sequence from the least significant byte Negative values are output as two s complement only in the case that the output data length is 32 bits in the case of 16 bit or 8 bit data overflow occurs D1 to D8 Data output STROB output OVF output ERROR output Data output port 16 25 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 4 Inspection Execution and Result Output Procedures IE Notes If an overflow occurs the number represented by the specified 8 bit range and the OVF signal overflow flag are output simultaneously e g if the register number result is 257 100000001 binary 1 and the overflow signal are output For registers where an error ER was generated for a judgment output or numerical calculation the value output is 0 Timing Chart with Handshaking 1 Timing chart T1 START _ A Post processing 1 READY T2 gt e B H D D1 to D8 Y STROB T4 F ACK E re T3 G REND lt gt Td gt r gt gt To Td To T1 Width of START signal 1ms min T2 Response time with respect to the START signal 1ms max T3 Image capture time varies according to cam
75. the difference of adjustment required between the coordinates recorded as setup reference point and the coordinates found when executed Individual checkers come under a position and rotation adjuster group and by applying the amount of adjustment checker coordinates can be adjusted by an appropriate amount for inspection The detection methods available for position and rotation adjusters are binary edge checkers gray edge checkers feature extractors and matching Settings for base checker Base checkers with different methods of inspection cannot be combined into one position and rotation adjuster For instance for position adjustment it is not possible to use a binary edge checker for horizontal adjustment and a feature extractor for vertical adjustment 14 different position and rotation adjuster modes are available with different types of base checker and different methods of inspection TYPE 1 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 1 BINARY EDGE DETECTION 2 GRAY EDGE DETECTION 3 FEATURE EXTRACTION 4 MATCHING Binary Pos Adj Edge Hor Det Rot Adj Detection _ Ver Det Rot Adj Gray Edge Pos Adj Detection Hor Det Rot Adj Ver Det Rot Adj Feature 7 One Chkr Pos Adj Extraction Theta Rot Adj One Chkr Rot Adj Two Chkr Rot Adj Matching One Chkr Pos Adj Theta Rot Adj One Chkr Rot Adj Two Chkr Rot Adj Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichec
76. the end point e If it is a square the X and Y coordinates of the start point and end point must be set higher than 4 x 4 If it is a line either the X or the Y coordinate of the start point and end point must be set higher than 4 6 Set Filter and Width if required When the Filter and Width menu item is selected the highlight cursor moves over to the value column Move the cursor lever up and down to set the value required 7 When required set position and rotation adjustment and exposure adjustment group numbers Multichecker A210 A110 Binary Edge Checkers 9 3 Restrictions on Binary Edge Checkers 9 3 Restrictions on Binary Edge Checkers In situations like those described below calculation errors may occur and prevent detection A If an object in the inspection area has a section with a width equal to the width parameter and the object is in touch with the bottom of the checker area when left right edge detection is being used or with the right of the checker area when up down edge detection is being used then the object may not be detected Figure 1 gt aie of object lt Filter parameter Cannot be detected Width of filter Width of filter Width of object Width parameter parameter parameter Figure 2 Width of object lt Filter parameter Cannot be detected Width of filter Width of object Width of object parameter Width parameter Width parameter If it is necessary
77. the line checker and set parameters etc 4 Dot Judgment If the dot count is within the range bounded by the upper and lower limits the dot judgment considered to be OK 1 and if the dot count exceeds the range it is considered to be NG 0 The dot judgment parameters can be set in the range 0 to 7666 5 Land Judgment If the land count is within the range bounded by the upper and lower limits the land judgment considered to be OK 1 and if the land count exceeds the range it is considered to be NG 0 The dot judgment parameters can be set in the range 0 to 2555 6 Adjustment Group Set whether or not the checker being created will be adjusted by a position and rotation adjuster or exposure adjuster Line Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 6 1 Line Checkers 7 Copy Checker When creating a checker copy the data from an existing checker 8 Delete Checker Delete a checker Dot judgment Number of dots The judgment results judged from the dot judgment conditions and the number of dots counted are shown Land judgments Number of lands The results judged from the land judgment conditions and the number of lands counted are shown Multichecker A210 A110 Line Checkers 6 1 2 6 1 Line Checkers Checker Setting Create the line checker and set parameters etc 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 TYPE i 31 LIHE Jud Dot NG Cnt Ho 1 Jud Land NG Cnt EMMMChecker S
78. the outline fluctuates due to the Deviation 0 75 workpiece Difference 128 A i Deviation 1 0 Deviation data va di Threshold value 96 Subtraction calculations Deviation X difference Binarization FX 7 A N EN gt OK gt SAN A AFAA Deviation X difference threshold value 128 3 128 U AX gt gt y N gt NG L dam am Deviation X difference gt threshold value Search image Subtraction result Deviation differentiation result Final result gt gt NG 12 13 Smart Matching Multichecker A210 A110 12 1 Smart Matching 36 37 38 Update Deviation Data Updates deviation data used in deviation differentiation Ifthe deviation data is not changed a single degree then it is set at 1 0 for all pixels As shown below deviation data is changed only for pixels that are converted to 1 in the threshold value processing performed under the direction of the execution results of the subtraction processing performed immediately prior The formula for calculating deviation data is shown below New deviation threshold value difference in brightness Diviations 0 75 N Threshold iviati N Yallie208 Diviation Be N AY Diviations 1 0 Difference 128 Thresholdvalue difference Subtruction result Diviati
79. the value is within the average gray scale value limits Average The average gray scale value detected is displayed 8 1 2 Checker Setting Create the check area and set parameters etc TYPE 1 6 GRAY WINDOW Jud HG Ho 1 Averages AMChecker Setting Rect 22 Area 206 200 305 279 23 Hask Shape Hone 24 Mask Area A 21 Shape Select the shape for the checker area 22 Area Create or move the checker area 23 Mask Shape Select the shape for the mask area 24 Mask Area Create or move the mask area Multichecker A210 A110 Gray Scale Window Checkers 8 2 Gray Scale Window Checker Setup 8 2 _Gray Scale Window Checker Setup Procedure 1 Set the number of the gray scale window checker to be created 2 Select Checker Setting then Shape 3 Set the inspection area to rectangle circle or polygon from Shape 4 Select Area from the menu and set the coordinates for the inspection area w See 2 11 Checker Area and Marker Area Setting Method for details of how to set the area re Note Circular elliptical areas must be set so that the difference between the X coordinate start point and end point is an odd number of pixels 5 Set the mask area to rectangle circle or polygon from Mask Shape 6 Select Mask Area from the menu and set the coordinates for the mask area w See 2 12 Setting Masking for details of how to set the mask area 7 Select Average Judgment from the menu
80. to eliminate unwanted parts Both dilation and erosion filters are available These filters work on a captured image performing dilation or erosion before inspection You can check enlarged and reduced images in the area setting screen for each checker Two levels offiltering 3 x 3and5 x 5 are available for both dilation and erosion filters working on a 3 pixel square or 5 pixel square relative to the original image Original image 3 x 3 dilation filter 5 x 5 dilation filter Inspection Procedure Multichecker A210 A110 2 14 Changing Shapes 2 14 Changing Shapes A shape change is applied at the position displayed before the change with the default size of the changed shape A shape cannot be changed if the whole of the inspection area is included within the mask area The No serching area exists Changes can t be stored error message is displayed Move the area to the center of the screen before attempting the shape change again If an attempt is made to change a shape at the edge of the screen and the Position is out of image range message is displayed move the area to the centre of the screen before attempting the shape change again Multichecker A210 A110 Inspection Procedure 2 15 Entering Upper and Lower Limit Values 2 15 Entering Upper and Lower Limit Values This section describes how to enter upper and lower limit values in the setup menu for each checker oe a Example Judgment c
81. to the one Push Enter Ke end direction then push Enter Key Fesus Level R Chg Area Bs 19 5 The Setting Help Tools Multichecker A210 A110 19 1 Use Setting Help Tools to Adjust Settings Before Inspecting 3 Aperture Helps you adjust the aperture correctly by watching a bar graph on the screen while turning the iris ring on the camera lens 1 Select 3 Aperture and a screen such as Figure a is displayed Press A Chg Area to set the area of the image with the required feature 2 Following the instructions turn the iris ring all the way in either direction then press ENTER Figure b 3 Next turn the iris ring all the way in the other direction then press ENTER again Figure c 4 Looking at the bar graph on screen turn the iris ring to a position where Iris is adjusted is displayed and adjust the ring to the position where the bar in the bar graph is closest to 100 Figure d Figure a Figure b a HELP TOOLS h is Ring to the one R Chg Rreaubi CiEsc Figure c Figure d 8 SETTING HELP TOOLS Ws SRO IMAGECH SCKER M100 Turn the iris Ring to the other end a ee Matsushita Electric Works Bar graph fsrantl ac INT INS IN i 1 COM COM IN2 IN4 COM A Chg Area B 19 6 Multichecker A210 A110 The Setting Help Tools 19 1 Use Setting Help Tools to Adjust Settings Before Inspecting 4 Threshold Level Recommended threshold level i
82. was input Camera switching failed 18 6 Mu Itichecker A210 A110 Error Output Timing chart for errors No parallel output handshake no error occurs D1 to D8 ERROR x se output handshake no error occurs ERROR OVF D1 to D8 OK ERR OK x ERROR OVF N 7 When an error occurs during numerical calculations Ge arallel output handshake overflow occurs D1 to D8 OK OVF OK and judgement output handshaking starts and the error signal turns on at the same time When there is an error in the numerical calculations OVF overflow signal turns on only when the register in which the error occurred is output 18 2 Error Signal Output Conditions 18 7 Error Output Multichecker A210 A110 18 2 Error Signal Output Conditions 18 8 Chapter 19 The Setting Help Tools 19 1 Use Setting Help Tools to Adjust Settings Before INSPECHNG 2 22 aus cay leees kxldadt ened tease antes 19 3 The Setting Help Tools Multichecker A210 A110 19 2 Multichecker A210 A110 The Setting Help Tools 19 1 Use Setting Help Tools to Adjust Settings Before Inspecting 19 1 Use Setting Help Tools to Adjust Settings Before Inspecting It is important to adjust camera and lighting settings properly before performing inspections The Setting Help Tools help with adjusting the settings making it easier to set the focus lightin
83. 0 and for rotation adjustment the reference angle is displayed The amount of adjustment for a direction which has not been set is fixed and displayed as 0 When the base position has been reset checkers dependent on the adjustment are displayed at the newly adjusted positions If an angle of rotation is applied the following message is displayed Data Changed but not saved After POHER OFF changes will be lost With the A210 for you select Yes dependent checkers are reset at the previous execution position but at this point they are reset with the angle of inclination disappearing Select No if you do not want to change the execution positions of dependent checkers Resetting at the base position is canceled 4 17 Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 2 The Various Modes for Position Rotation Adjustment Checkers IE Notes Conditions for changing execution position When position and rotation adjuster binary edge position adjustment is set Each checker is reset with angle 0 close to the previous execution position When position and rotation adjuster has been deleted All dependent checkers return to their original setting positions Next execution is from the setting position With the A210 when a dependent checker with rotation angle adjusted is reset The dependent checker is reset with angle 0 close to the previous execution position 4 18 Multichecker A210
84. 1 Select 5 Multi Threshold and press A Chg Area to set the area of the image for extraction Multi Checker A210 Ver 1 2 8 SETTING HELP TOOLS 427 102 gt 446 174 2 After afew seconds the recommended values for upper and lower threshold levels are displayed 3 Use the cursor lever for fine adjustment of the threshold levels Multi Checker A200 Ver 1 2 8 SETTING HELP TOOLS Average Intensity of Area 198 Recommended Level 216 Threshold Level 5 A Chg Area Bt CESC 19 8 Multichecker A210 A110 The Setting Help Tools 19 1 Use Setting Help Tools to Adjust Settings Before Inspecting 6 Image Profile Displays a graph of gray scale distribution along a line specified on the image Select Image Profile and a straight line and corresponding graph are displayed on the screen as shown below Press A to draw a straight line at the point you wish to be graphed Press B to switch the line to a vertical line MAES MALS gt RO IMAGECHECKER gt RO IMAGECHECKER Www Matsushita Electirit Works Ltd Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Ha ac mt oa ns Tui ac ese PETE IN ie ROM i Gah CAM Ne INI ne RON 7 In Out Monitor Checks the parallel interface by monitoring input states and forcing output states Useful for checking input and output data flow when the A210 A110 is connected to an external device 8 SETTING HELP TOOLS Input ON E ERR REND STR OVF_ Input OFF DA D2 DS
85. 12 3 Serial Commands The following three bytes of binary data forms one set Start code STX 0x02 key code see diagram below end code ETX 0x03 Key code list Up 8 0x38 Right Up 9 0x39 Down 2 0x32 Right Down 3 0x33 Left 4 0x34 Left Up 7 0x37 Right 6 0x36 Left Down 1 0x31 A A 0x41 B B 0x42 Cc C 0x43 Enter 5 0x35 The external device receives no response output for receive response for the input command above from the A210 A110 The contents of the inverted commas are the key codes Example Command when the Down key is entered followed by the ENTER key 0x020x320x030x020x350x03 Down key ENTER key Note When the A key command is input using key emulation it is not possible to stop repeated inspection execution 16 55 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 13 Computer Link 16 13 Computer Link 16 13 1 Outline This is a communications mode that has protocols that allow the Image Checker to communicate with certain programmable logic controllers hereafter PLC Because the Image Checker can write inspection results numerical calculation and judgment results there is no need for the PLC to perform polling or flag monitoring and this reduces the load on the PLC communications program It is possible to switch types by referring to values set in
86. 16 37 16 7 4 Notes Regarding Execution Order for Re registration 16 42 16 8 Switching the Display Camera A210 only 16 44 16 8 1 Serial Parallel Settings 16 44 16 8 2 Communication Settings 16 45 16 8 3 Using Serial Input to Switch the Display Camera 16 45 16 8 4 Using Parallel Input to Switch the Display Camera 16 46 w next page 16 2 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 9 Referencing and Changing Maximum Minimum Slice Level Values zn cn 16 9 1 Items related to serial communication 16 9 2 Referencing the maximum and minimum values 2 cc 16 9 3 Changing the maximum and minimum values 0c ee 16 10Referencing and Changing Gray Scale Edge Threshold Values 16 10 1 Items related to serial communication 16 10 2 Referencing the threshold value 16 10 3 Changing the threshold value 16 11 Referencing and Changing Maximum Minimum Numerical Calculation Values 16 11 1 Items related to serial communication 16 11 2 Referencing the maximum and minimum values 22 con 16 11 3 Changing the maximum and minimum value 2 2 con 16 12Key Emulate runs sanken 16 12 1 Items related to serial parallel communications 0 Here 16 12 2 Communication Settings 16 12 3 Seri
87. 2 Checker Setting Use this to create the checker and set items such as the scan conditions 3 Base Pos Execute a test to register the base point for adjustment 4 Pos Rot Adj Group Set which checker is to be used for adjustment in the case that you are using multiple settings for position and rotation adjustment Select a group number rm Refer to 4 4 Position Adjustment Groups for details 5 Delete Checker Use this to delete a checker Note If you delete a Position Adjustment Checker the inspection results for all checkers that follow the deleted checker are cleared Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 4 Next perform the checker settings Select Checker Setting to display the setting menu 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 Matching Theta Rot 2 eee ails I Search er 0 0 511 479 Sequence Output Unit Check Template 21 Template 22 Search Area 23 Sequence 24 Output Unit 25 Check Template Set each of the items For details regarding the settings refer to 12 1 2 Checker Settings and 12 1 4 Check Template in 12 Smart Matching Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 5 Set the base position Select Base and press the A Test key to display the current detection coordinates detection angles and correlation values a maximum
88. 51 Com Mode Normal Mode 52 RS232C 53 Serial Output 54 Parallel Output 55 Min Ready Off Time Oms 56 Key Emulate No Com Mode RS232C Serial Output Settings required for serial communication Parallel Output Settings required for parallel communication Min Ready OFF Time It is possible to use serial or parallel communication to set the minimum time that the Ready signal is off for range O to 1000ms in 10ms steps Key Emulate Select this when you will perform menu selections and settings using serial commands rather than using the keypad 16 8 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 2 Communication Settings 16 2 2 Com Mode Select either Normal Mode or Computer Link for performing serial communications 7 ENVIRONMENT F Communication EXHicom Mode Normal Mode 52 RS232C 53 Serial Output 54 ParalleLo 55 Min P Com Mode Normal Mode Computer Link Normal Mode Perform communication using the proprietary Image Checker protocol All commands are available for use 1 Computer Link With this mode you match the communications protocol to that of a specific PLC Matsushita Electric Works PLC FP Series Mitsubishi PLC A Series and FX Series or Omron PLC C Series for inspection data output and reading the Type No when switching types However the Normal Mode commands cannot be used 1 because communication using parallel signals is required wm For det
89. 73 Hidth 274 Average Area 271 Scan Pitch Only for individual scans Set the interval in terms of pixels in the scanning direction at which scanning is performed in the inspection area The initial value is 1 Setting a wide pitch makes inspection faster but there is a greater interval between the sections examined If the pitch is set wider than the scanning area only a single line is scanned Scan pitch 1 Scan pitch 2 Scanning direction Scanning direction 272 Filter The filter function is a function that combines and makes one edge ifthe interval between pixels where an edge was detected relative to the scanning direction is less than the filter value 273 Width can only be set for individual scans The width function counts the detected number of edges in the vertical direction relative to the scanning direction calculates the sum of the continuous edge counts and if it is as large as or larger than the width value records it as an edge Gray Scale Edge Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 10 1 Gray Scale Edge Checkers 2 Point Filter Width X Edge position Direction of the scan D E 38 g 5 0 5 a3 OE Ae AR Number of edges o TER Number of edges count of edges detected for each individual scan line 3 171 0 0 5 4 0 0 0 0 3 1 0 o 5la
90. 8 Switching the Display Camera A210 only Camera number and parallel port for Detailed Mode Display Camera lmage A camera Thru image B camera Thru image A camera Mem image B camera Mem image IN7 Display switch timing IN1 to IN2 Camera image designation No READY Ready signal Data output port ERROR Error flag Data input port Camera switching timing chart for Detailed Mode Camera No IN to IN2 X oo D READY signal READY ON D Camera IN7 OFF B switch input ON X ERROR signal ERROR ore A B C D Input the Camera No from the external device With the READY signal on input IN7 from the external device The falling edge off to on of IN7 is detected and the READY signal goes off After the camera has switched the READY signal goes on if a display switch error is generated the ERROR flag goes on at the same time as the READY signal A B D 16 47 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 9 Referencing and Changing Maximum Minimum Slice Level Values 16 9 Referencing and Changing Maximum Minimum Slice Level Values 16 9 1 Items related to serial communication Parallel Serial Details I O terminal Command Refer to max and min L CR limits 1 to 6 L n n amp Response to reference ie to 6 Slice Level No Group Ato F A 1 Change max and min T n nCR B 2 F limits 1 t
91. A F Note If the standard camera being used is the ANM830A set this to Yes ANM830A 3 2 3 Start Set the inspection start method Repeated inspection is only possible with the Main menu Checker and Spreadsheets Numerical Calculation menu Judgment menu and Spreadsheets menu Once When A is pressed or if a start input is received from the parallel interface or a start command is received from the serial interface a single inspection is performed Manual Repeat When A is pressed or if a start input is received from the parallel interface or a start command is received from the serial interface continuous repeated inspection commences until A is pressed again Inspection stops even if another start input is received from the parallel or serial interface Auto Repeat Continuous repeated inspection commences as soon as the power is turned on Inspection stops when A is pressed After inspection stops restarting is the same as for Repeat manual A button Parallel start Serial S Serial P Serial R Once Single inspection Single inspection Single inspection Single inspection Single inspection Manual Repeat Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Single inspection Auto Repeat inspection inspection inspection inspection ia Note If you want to stop the inspection using parallel start signal input the start signal when the READY signal was turned OFF and hold the start signal ON u
92. A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker The only time that it is possible for you to select the type for a Position Rotation Adjustment checker is when you are creating a new one If a checker has already been set for the number that you select either select a new number or delete the checker set for the selected number and perform the settings again 4 3 1 Setting a Position Adjustment Checker that uses Binary Edge Detection This explains how to use a Binary Edge checker as an adjustment checker If you are unfamiliar with the operation of Binary Edge checkers first read 9 Binary Edge Checkers Here we will set checkers for the horizontal and vertical directions although is also possible to perform adjustment using just one of them When using both checkers you must specify which one has priority Procedure 1 Select the Position Rotation Adjustment Checker number TYPE 1 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 1 BINARY EDGE DETECTION 2 GRAY EDGE DETECTION 3 FEATURE EXTRACTION 4 MATCHING 2 Select BINARY EDGE DETECTION 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 1 BINARY EDGE DETECTION 11 Pos Adj 12 Hor Det Rot Adj 13 Ver Det Rot Adj 4 19 Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 3 Select Pos Adj position adjustment The setting m
93. Adjustment Checker 3 Select Theta Rot Adj The setting menu for theta rotation adjustment using feature extraction is displayed Use Select Camera to select the camera and Delete Checker to delete the checker as required 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 Feat Extr Theta Rot Checker Setting Slice Level No Base Pos Pos Rot Adj Group Delete Checker 1 Select Camera Select either the camera A or camera B image for operating the Position Adjustment checker 2 Checker Setting Use this to create the checker and set items such as the scan conditions 3 Slice Level No Select the Slice Level No for the base checker 4 Base Pos Execute a test to register the base point for adjustment 5 Pos Rot Adj Group Set which checker is to be used for adjustment in the case that you are using multiple settings for position and rotation adjustment Select a group number rm Refer to 4 4 Position Adjustment Groups for details 6 Delete Checker Use this to delete a checker ia Note If you delete a Position Adjustment Checker the inspection results for all checkers that follow the deleted checker are cleared Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 4 Make the Checker settings Select Checker Setting to display the checker setting menu 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 Feat Extr Theta
94. Camera Use the following commands to switch the display 10 p Switch to camera A Image Thru g 11 p Switch to camera B Image Thru g 12Cp Switch to camera A Image Mem 13 Switch to camera B Image Mem After executing switching the following commands are returned ICR Switching was executed normally ZCR Switching could not be done Check the camera switching settings and the capture camera settings UCR An invalid command was sent An invalid command e g 14Cp was sent 16 45 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 8 Switching the Display Camera A210 only 16 8 4 Using Parallel Input to Switch the Display Camera Parallel port in Easy Mode Data input port IN7 Timing for switching the display camera READY Ready signal Data output port Data output port ERROR Error flag Timing chart for camera switching in Easy Mode OFF READY signal READY ON B Camera IN OFF A switch input ON x A ERROR signal ERROR ow A With the READY signal on input IN7 from the external device B The falling edge off to on of IN7 is detected and the READY signal goes off C After the camera has switched the READY signal goes on if a display switch error is generated the ERROR flag goes on at the same time as the READY signal 16 46 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16
95. Changing the maximum and minimum value Maximum value Minimum value Register No two digits 01 to 96 The following is output if the maximum and minimum values for the numerical calculation are changed normally N n n CR Maximum value Minimum value Register No two digits 01 to 96 16 53 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 12 Key Emulate for Ver 2 3 or later 16 12 Key Emulate for Ver 2 3 or later It is possible emulate keyboard operations by inputting serial commands from an external device to the serial port COM TOOL 16 12 1 Items related to serial parallel communications Parallel Serial Details I O terminal Command STX Keycode ETX Direction key 8 directions Key Emulate ENTER key input STX5ETX STX Keycode ETX ae A Key A B Key B C Key C A B and C key input No response is returned from the A210 A110 to input commands 16 12 2 Communication Settings Set Key Emulate in Environment Communications to Yes the default setting is No It is not possible to input commands unless you make this setting 7 ENVIRONMENT 15 _Keffululttoitegtite 51 Com Mode Normal Mode 52 RS232C 53 Serial Output 54 Parallel Output 55 Min Ready Off Time Oms 56 Key Emulate No 16 54 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 12 Key Emulate for Ver 2 3 or later 16
96. Chapter 6 Line Checkers 6 1 Line Checkers nn na ennen nn 6 3 6 1 1 Main Menu 2222 nee nennen 6 3 6 1 2 Checker Setting 002ccce ee eaee 6 5 6 2 Line Checker Setup 2 00 cee c cece eee 6 8 Line Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 Multichecker A210 A110 Line Checkers 6 1 Line Checkers 6 1 Line Checkers Line checkers are used to draw lines at locations for measurement and for counting the number of black or white dots or lands continuous areas of the same colour dot on the line Line checkers can have three different shapes straight lines polygonal lines and arcs Line checkers are useful for measuring dimensions and for inspecting moldings for burrs or missing sections You can set up to 96 checkers per type for the A210 and up to 48 per type for the A110 6 1 1 Main Menu TYPE 1 31 LIHE Jud Dot HG Cnt Ho 1 Jud Land NG Cnt A slice Level Ho A Checker Setting Dot Judgnent lt 7666 0 gt Adj Group Copy Checker 2 3 4 5 Land Judgnent lt 2555 0 gt 6 Les 8 Delete Checker No Checker No Set the number of the line checker to be created 1 Select Camera For the A210 select which camera A or B will supply the image on which the line checker is to be activated This is fixed at A in the case of the A110 2 Slice Level No Select the binary level group for the line checker being created 3 Checker Setting Create
97. Coeff 4 When you finish inputting the number of reference pixels the scale factor is calculated automatically Base Dist Base Pixel Coeff i Note The four sets of conversion data set in CV01 to CV04 reference distance number of pixels and scale factor are not initiallized even if the data for all types is initiallized To initiallize the conversion data either initiallize the environment data or individually delete each item by moving the cursor to it and pressing the B Delete button Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 13 3 Numerical Calculation 13 3 Numerical Calculation 13 3 1 About Numerical Calculations programs can be created to carry out numerical calculations on the results of measurements by checkers You can set up to a maximum of 96 formulas for each type 48 formulas for the A110 The image cannot be changed once you enter the Numerical Calculation menu so if you wish to be able to see a particular image during numerical calculation setup change to the required image before entering the Numerical Calculation menu Numerical calculation Setting menu 4 2 2 2 1 3 TYP 1 8 HUMERIQAL CALCNLATION Data Bit CA01 CA04 Sb i t EESTE ets 7 Se B Copy A Tine 0 0ns 1 Register No The register setting No CA01 to CA96 for numerical calculation programs These are displayed four at a time Move the cursor lever left or right to display the previous or following fo
98. Cove Select the appropriate position for base point 1 from the table and press the ENTER key The coordinates that you select are registered as the base point 1 position Switch to the Base Point 2 table and select the appropriate position for base point 2 from the table and press the ENTER key The coordinates that you select are registered as the base point 2 position Use the arrow keys to switch between the base point 1 and 2 settings When you return to the setting menu the adjustment amounts AX AY and 490 are displayed at the top right of the screen Press the B key to check the base position using the image Press the C key to cancel the base position wm Refer to Setting the base position on page 4 17 for details Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 4 Position Adjustment Groups 4 4 Position Adjustment Groups A particular position adjustment is associated with checkers by specifying the position adjustment group number for the checker to use Inspection checkers initially have the position adjustment group number set to 0 so if you want a checker to use a position adjuster you must first define the position adjustment then specify its position adjustment group number IE Note After defining a position adjuster be sure to give it a group number so that other checkers can be use it for position adjustment Specifying the group number When defining an inspection checker
99. ER 1 POS ROT ADJ 1 gt P4 3 2 3 4 2 EXPOSURE A ADJ 2 gt P5 3 Next page NOP W Screen Display Checker Pattern Make Bright at NG Detect Position Status Display Marker BINARY EDGE DETECTION gt P4 5 MTI GRAY EDGE DETECTION gt P4 8 FEATURE EXTRACTION gt P4 10 MATCHING gt P4 13 Epi Select Camera Checker E Base Average judgment Pos Rot Adj Group Copy Checker Delete Checker 11 12 13 21 22 23 33 34 41 Theta Rot Adj A210 only 43 44 21 22 23 gt P1 11 gt P2 14 gt P1 11 gt P1 11 P1 12 gt P15 8 Pos Adj PP4 5 Hor Det Rot Adj A210 only gt P4 6 Ver Det Rot Adj A210 only P4 7 Pos Adj P4 8 Hor Det Rot Adj A210 only gt P4 9 Ver Det Rot Adj A210 only gt P4 10 One Chkr Pos Adj P4 10 Theta Rot Adj A210 only gt P4 11 One Chkr Rot Adj A210 only gt P4 Two Chkr Rot Adj A210 only p gt P4 12 One Chkr Pos Adj P4 13 P4 13 One Chkr Rot Adj A210 only gt P4 14 Two Chkr Rot Adj A210 only gt P4 15 Shape Area Coefficient 21 3 Menu Layout Multichecker A210 A110 21 1 Menu Layout 3 INSPECTION 31 LINE 1 Select Camera CHECKER P6 3 2 Slice Level No 3 Checker Setting 31 Shape 32 Area 33 Dot Count 34 Land Count 35 Land Filter 36 Gap Filter 37 Filter 4 Dot Judgment 5 Land Judgment
100. Input Type Title Capture Camera A Camera Image A Gray Thru Menu Setting Execution Mode Initialize All Type TYPE 1 Input the type number Input any number in the range 1 to 64 for the A210 or 1 to 32 for the A110 If data has already been set for the number entered the appropriate settings are displayed If no data has been entered then only the type number is displayed 1 Copy Type Copies the type data 2 Delete Type Deletes the type data 3 Input Type Title Allows you to enter a title for the type If you select Input Type Title the Keyboard menu is displayed allowing you to enter a title You can enter up to 16 characters for a title 4 Capture Camera Set the image capture camera for each type 5 Camera lmage Select the camera image to be displayed on the monitor when the selected type is read due to application of power or by the type switch operation 6 Menu Setting The settings made here are used for the display when the selected type is read due to application of power or by the type switch operation 3 18 Multichecker A210 A110 Environment and Type 3 3 Types 7 Execution Mode Select from Execute All Mode Autom Switch Mode and User Defined Mode mw Refer to 2 2 2 Execution Modes 8 Initialize all Types Returns all type settings to the original factory settings Note that if you select this all the product data you have entered will be deleted Rest Displays the amou
101. List w Refer to 13 7 Checker List Spreadsheet Refer to 13 5 Spreadsheets Checker Pattern Select the checker pattern display method Select Off if you do not want to display the checker pattern rm For details about the checker pattern refer to 2 5 Checker Pattern Display Fixed The checker pattern is displayed in a fixed position Response The checker pattern display is moved in accordance with the amount of position adjustment F Notes When Fixed is selected if Detect Position was set to On display it is automatically set to Off If the cameras selected for the checkers do not match those selected using Camera lmage the checker pattern is not displayed Make Bright at NG Checker patterns for NG No Good checkers are displayed with high brightness and checker patterns for OK checkers are displayed with low brightness IES Note When Checker Pattern is set to Off no display the Make Bright at NG setting is fixed at No Detect Position Select whether of not to display the coordinates of the position detected by execution of the checker rs Note When Fixed is selected for the Checker Pattern setting the Detect Position setting cannot be changed 1 11 Screens and Basic Operations Multichecker A210 A110 1 3 Main Screen Operations Status Display Select which item either the Outputs or Time is to be displayed on the bottom ofthe screen Select Off to display nothing Outputs Displays t
102. N D1 to D8 y JERROR zs OFF Error ON ea ee Ha a OFF IE Note The timing of the Error output going off when an error has occurred is synchronized with the output data D1 to D8 Off after read With this setting the data output is switched off after image capture After an image is captured the previous outputs are all set to off and the data is output when inspection ends OFF START re Wr ON a a OFF m READY ON N D1 to DB see CE gen ERROR Error OFF o OFF 16 29 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 4 Inspection Execution and Result Output Procedures re Note The timing of the Error output going off when an error has occurred is synchronized with the REND output going on Off before read With this setting the data output is switched off before image capture Before an image is captured when the READY signal goes off after the START signal is detected the previous outputs are all set to off and the data is output when inspection ends This method is useful when the inspection processing time is extremely short OFF START oa u ON ea OFF wer ze a SEEN READY ON Error ERROR OFF ON OFF ee Er ia Note The timing for switching the error output off when an error has occurred is synchronous with the output data D1 to D8 16 30 Multichecker A210 A110 Communi
103. Panasonic MICRO IMAGECHECKER A210 A110 Multichecker V2 User s Manual N r COM COM FLA m O POWER FLA O POWER conj III O ERROR com I O ERROR RDY LL OREADY RDY pm j eral I Ferm ERR KEYPAD REN p REN pm STR pm STR DI y OVF OVF 1 B ot III D1 Son D2 D2 os III D3 oon Da II Dal III Bon D5 D5 ol O D6 TOOL D7 D7 ol III D8 COM COM sta III STA S col COM en ACK ACK TYP pm T TYP T IN II x IN1 x IN2 O IN2 O IN3 DI wu IN3 Y 1 zZ IN4 IN4 pm O O INS pm W INS Wy ING II ING x IN DI S IN S IN8 fo gt IN8 gt Dm Q Q HI S t amp wa JS Z S A z Di A210 A110 Multichecker V2 User s Manual ARCT1F424E 06 9 http www nais e com Matsushita Electric Works Ltd WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS To be observed at all times Read the manual carefully before installing running maintaining or inspecting the equipment This manual uses two safety flags to indicate different levels of danger
104. Plural individual edge D E and F 5 positions output 10 10 Multichecker A210 A110 Gray Scale Edge Checkers 10 1 Gray Scale Edge Checkers 10 1 3 Result Display result information for up to 99 detected edges TYPE 1 35 GRAY EDGE DETECTION Ho 1 Jud NG Detected O Up Down No Diff Co X co Y 1 259 0 2 50 178 3 2587 3 65 1815 a 72 1842 A Test B Pos Dsp CsEsc iA Tine 0 0ns A Test In camera mode Captures an image from the camera and inspects it In memory mode Inspects a current memory image without capturing a new image from the camera Displays the results after inspection B Pos Dsp After deleting the display of results display the detected edge position and the edge data coordinates and differential value Pressing C returns to the display of results C Esc Pressing C returns to the display of results Edge Cnt 4 Edge No 1 Diff 35 Co X 195 5 Co Y 259 0 A B Disp All C Esc t Prev l Next 10 11 Gray Scale Edge Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 10 1 Gray Scale Edge Checkers With projection scanning the image resulting from projection processing is displayed s B Disp All Display the positions of all the edges detected as a pattern C Esc Pressing C returns to the display of results Prev Displays the edge immediately prior to the one currently being displayed
105. Proj 364 Theta 365 Filter 37 Output T 371 Sorting Unit 372 Sorting 4 Detected Judgment Order 5 Object Area 6 Adj Group Te Pos Rot Adj Group 62 Expo Adj Group 7 Result 8 Copy Checker 9 Delete Checker 37 SMART Select Camera MATCHING Checker Setting 21 Template PP12 3 22 Search Area 23 Sequence 24 Output Unit TE 241 Sorting 242 Sorting Order 3 Subtraction 31 Subtraction Setting 32 Sub Area Judgment A210 only 33 Thres Value 34 Filter 35 Deviation 36 Update Devi Data 37 Put Devi Data back 38 Initialize Devi Data 4 Pos Rot Adj Group 5 Check Template 6 Result Next page 7 Copy Checker 8 Delete Checker 21 5 Menu Layout Multichecker A210 A110 21 1 4 DATA MONITOR 5 SPREADSHEET 6 CONVERSION DATA gt P13 4 7 ENVIRON 1 MENT P3 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Menu Layout GROUP MOVE gt P15 16 NUMERICAL CALCULATION P13 6 JUDGMENT P gt P13 23 IMAGE DATA P15 3 Marker P15 8 gt P13 36 Pm P13 33 cvo1 Cvo2 CVo3 CVo4 11 Ew 13 Camera P3 5 Start gt P3 6 Start Trigger gt P3 7 Start Type gt P3 12 No 1 Communication 51 gt P3 13 52 56 61 62 63 Save Image Mode gt P3 15 Initialize gt P3 17 Display Setting gt P3 14 BOn Camera Mode Shutter Speed Flash Last store Type No Com Mode P16 9 RS232C gt P16 10 Serial Output gt P16 12 Parallel Output P16 14 M
106. Read End None JDO1 534 Process End None r 535 Numerical Calc Output If an error occurs with the numerical an 536 Judgment Output calculation an e is output Example 1025130325 _e0098C The zeros are replaced with spaces 16 23 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 4 16 4 3 Inspection Execution and Result Output Procedures Inspection Using Parallel Communication Procedure 1 Perform the communications settings 7 ENVIRONMENT 154 WET KeIN IT 541 Handshakg 542 Reset Cond 543 Setting Template 544 Disp Img Change 541 2 Startins Latch No Handshake Details Mode Set the handshaking Yes No and set the data output selection and Type in the case that the setting is Yes When set to Yes also set the following 5411 Timeout 5412 Delay Time wm Refer to the time chart on page 16 26 5413 Numerical Calculation Output None 5414 Judgment Output Output None pection After confirming output of the READY signal from the parallel port input the START signal as indicated in the table below tem Details Input terminal Execute All Autom Switch start inspection Specific substitution formula Not executed Specific substitution formula Executed Reinspect image capture Not executed STA START ACK STA signal hold ACK until READY OFF IN6 no image capture specified STA
107. Response Display in accordance with the position adjustment result 63 Make Bright at NG _ Yes No Fixed at No when the checker pattern display is set to off 64 Detect Position ___ Off On Fixed at Off when the checker pattern display is set to Fixed 65 Status Display _ Off r Outputs Time 66 Marker 9 _____ Off On 4 Press ENTER to confirm Multichecker A210 A110 Environment and Type 3 3 Types 3 3 10 Setting the Execution Mode Use 7 Execution Mode to select either Execute All Autom Switch Automatic Switch or User Defined for the execution order for each checker TYPE 1 1 TYPE Rest No 1 1 Copy Type Delete Type 2 a d _ExecutionMode 5 6 a Gray Thru Autom Switch EABExecuti User Defined _ ecute All 8 Initialize All Types Procedure 1 Set and confirm the type number for setting the execution mode 2 Select and confirm 7 Execution Mode 3 Use the cursor lever in the Execution Mode window to select the execution mode that you want to use and confirm the selection Execute All Executes all set checkers in numerical order Autom Switch Automatic Switch Executes the checkers in Block 1 and then executes either the Block 2 or Block 3 checkers depending on the result of the judgment output User Defined Executes the checkers in the block specified by external input serial or parallel w Refer to 2 2 2 Ex
108. Select Camera Select which camera A or B will supply the image on which the smart matching checker is to be activated This is fixed at A in the case of the A110 2 Checker Settings Create the matching checker and set the checker conditions 3 Substraction Settings Set the parameters for the subtraction settings 4 Position and Rotation Adjustment Group Set which position and rotation adjuster will correct the matching checker to be created 5 Check Template You can verify the set template image and the compressed image being processed 6 Result Displays the inspection results 7 Copy Checker When creating a checker copy the data from an existing checker 8 Delete Checker Delete a checker Smart Matching Multichecker A210 A110 12 1 Smart Matching 12 1 2 Checker Settings Create the matching checker and set the checker conditions TYPE 1 sABC 37 SHART HATCHING Jud NG Ho 1 Detected 0 MMChecker Setting 1 Template i Output Unit gt 22 Search Area 0j 0 511 479 23 Sequence 24 Output Unit Ho 21 Template Register the template image that will serve as the checker base Set a square area for the checker base Then set the output point for outputting the coordinate position of the checker results After the template area is confirmed the output point can be set anywhere inside the area using the cursor lever Press A Tmp Cnt to set the point in the centre of the area
109. TYPE 1 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 BINARY EDGE DETECTION 2 GRAY EDGE DETECTION 3 FEATURE EXTRACTION 4 MATCHING 2 Select MATCHING 1 POS ROT ADJ No o GS MATCHING 42 Theta Rot Adj 43 One Chkr Rot Adj 44 Two Chkr Rot Adj Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 3 Select One Chkr Pos Adj The setting menu for one checker position adjustment using matching is displayed Use Select Camera to select the camera and Delete Checker to delete the checker as required 1 POS ROT ADJ DEREN No 1 Miasas Matching One Chkr Pos a Checker Setting Pos Rot Adj Group 2 3 BasePos joa 4 5 Delete Checker 1 Select Camera Select either the camera A or camera B image for operating the Position Adjustment checker 2 Checker Setting Use this to create the checker and set items such as the scan conditions 3 Base Pos Execute a test to register the base point for adjustment 4 Pos Rot Adj Group Set which checker is to be used for adjustment in the case that you are using multiple settings for position and rotation adjustment Select a group number rm Refer to 4 4 Position Adjustment Groups for details 5 Delete Checker Use this to delete a checker Note If you delete a Position Adjustment Checker the inspection results for all checkers that follow the deleted checker ar
110. TYPE to off Ready goes on when the type switch timing is complete 16 5 5 Points of caution regarding type switching Type switching is performed even if the type number is the same as the current number An error signal will be output if you specify an undefined type number Be sure to turn off the signal used for specifying a product type number before you execute inspection next time If the signal for specifying a product type number has been already input when start signal is input the following special inspections may be executed IN1 IN2 Inspection by way of specifying the block number in User Defined mode IN6 Re inspection without execution if image capture 16 33 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 6 Saving Type Data 16 6 Saving Type Data 16 6 1 Items related to serial and parallel communication Parallel Serial Details I O terminal Command Save data instruction Save type data Save complete Input the input command after confirming that the READY signal has been output from the parallel port 16 6 2 Saving type data using serial communication Use the following command to execute a data save MCR If the data saved normally the following command is output MSR If the data could not be saved for some reason the following command is output In this case resend the data save command until the save complete command is ou
111. There are two types of flow control soft flow and hard flow Soft flow controls the data flow using an XON XOFF code embedded in the transmitted data while hard control uses the RTS CTS signal Generally soft flow is used when the transmitted data contains only text and hard flow is used for binary data However neither type of flow control can completely prevent all errors and overflows may also be generated due to processing on the computer side If this happens either switch to a faster computer or decrease the baud rate Re communication speed J BZ 16 11 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 2 Communication Settings 16 2 4 Serial Output Settings Normal Mode Select the data signals and format for performing serial communication using Normal Mode 7 ENVIRONMENT 153 Serial Output 11Colum 1 11 532 Inval Digit Repl 0 533 Read End None 534 Process End None 535 Numerical Calc None 536 Judgment None 531 532 533 534 535 536 Output Set the number of digits in the output data setting range 1 to 11 Inval Digit Set the method of handling invalid digits in the output data If you select Del the data is handled as variable length data and if you select Repl 0 the data is handled as fixed length data with the number of digits specified in the Output setting Read End Select whether or not to perform serial output of the Image Captur
112. User Defined block specifica tion start inspection command Specific substitution formula Not executed IN1 to IN2 block specified STA Specific substitution formula Executed IN1 to IN2 block specified IN6 STA START signals hold ACK until READY OFF Group specification reinspection image capture Not executed IN1 to IN2 block specified IN6 reinspect specified STA 16 24 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 4 Inspection Execution and Result Output Procedures Block No specification BIN data lookup table for user defined execution About Parallel Communications Parallel communications without handshaking Judgment results are output using JDO1 to JDO8 T1 ki START a ent MSE E Do READY T2 A TE D1 to D8 L T3 REND NEUN T1 START signal width 1ms min T2 Response time with respect to START signal 1ms max T3 The image capture time differs depending on the camera that you connect F Note The JRO1 to JR96 and JD09 to JD96 numerical calculations and judgment results are not output Parallel communications with handshaking 1 When you have set to output both numerical calculation results and judgment results the judgment is output first followed by the numerical calculations The judgment output ends after the output of the last number set for judgment output Numbers not specified in
113. Y 1 to 479 1 to 479 x1 If theta could not be obtained the output value for theta is 1800 and the on screen display is 180 0 Data detectable by feature extractor a Count of objects When labeling has been used detect how many of the specified objects are within the area Up to 128 objects can be detected Centre coordinates of object Detects the position of the centre of gravity With labeling Centre of gravity coordinates can be measured for each individual land meeting the area limits for detection Without labeling Measures overall centre of gravity coordinates when the total area of specified object meets the area limits for detection Area of objects Measures the area detected With labeling Area can be measured for each individual land meeting the area limits for detection Without labeling Measures the area when the total area of the target colour meets the area limits for detection Perimeter lengths of objects Measures the perimeter lengths in pixels of individual labeled lands With labeling Perimeter length is measured for each individual land meeting the area limits for detection Without labeling Perimeter lengths are not measured 11 12 Multichecker A210 A110 Feature Extraction 11 2 Output Values for Detection Results e Projected widths of objects Measures the projected widths of individual labeled lands With labeling Projected width is measured for each
114. a Set each of the items For details regarding the settings refer to 10 Gray Scale Edge Checkers This same menu is displayed when you select Vertical Checker 5 Set the priority Specify whether the vertical or horizontal checker results are to have priority When you select Priority the following menu is displayed Make the appropriate selection w Refer to Priority on page 4 16 for details No Hor Ver Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 3 er Note Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker Set the base position rw Refer to Setting the base position on page 4 17 for details 1 POS ROT ADJ Jud NG No 1 Gray Edge Pos Adj 1 Select Camera 2 Horizontal Checker 3 Vertical Checker 4 Priority 5 Eee tele 6 Pos Rot Adj Group 7 Delete Checker A Test B Image Press the A Test key to display the current detection coordinates and angle 1 POS ROT ADJ Jud NG No 1 Gray Edge Pos Adj 1 Select Camera 2 Horizontal Checker 3 Vertical Checker 4 Priority Detection coordinates No Base Pos 61 39138 0989 3 6 Pos Rot Adj Group 0 7 Delete Checker and angle A Test B Image Press the B Image key to check the base position using the image Press the ENTER key to register the displayed coordinates and angle as the base position The adjustment amounts AX AY and 4 0 are displayed at the top right of the
115. action function is effective for detecting objects whose positions attitudes and numbers are not known in advance The values for features obtained can be used independently or in combinations to judge the shapes of objects directly The shapes available for feature extractors are rectangle circle and polygon and the shapes available for masks are also rectangle circle and polygon Up to a maximum of 128 lands can be detected Numerical calculations can only use up to 99 results You can set up to 96 checkers per type for the A210 and up to 48 per type for the A110 11 1 1 Main Menu TYPE i 36 FEATURE EXTRACTION Jud HG Ho 1 Detected 0O A e Slice Level Ho A Checker Setting Detected Judgment lt 128 0 Adj Group Result Copy Checker 2 3 4 5 Object Area 245760 1 gt 6 7 8 9 Delete Checker No Checker No Setting for the number of the feature extractor to be created 1 Select Camera For the A210 select which camera A or B will supply the image on which the feature extraction checker is to be activated This is fixed at A in the case of the A110 2 Slice Level No Select the binarization level group for the feature extractor being created 3 Checker Setting Create the feature extractor and set judgment conditions etc 4 Detected Judgment Set judgment of good products and rejects on the basis of upper and lower limits on the number of objects extracted 5 Object Area Set the up
116. agoras s theorem Using the Distance T function CA03 CA01TCA02 In both cases the result is output multiplied by 10000 Angle 6 CA04 CA02 10000 CA01 In the case of the Atan formula the input is multiplied by 10000 and the result is output multiplied by 100 Pythagoras s theorem c a b c y af b5 Trigonometry Angle 0 tan b a 13 12 Multichecker A210 A110 Optional Memory 13 3 Numerical Calculation 13 3 2 Creating a Numerical Calculation program Creating a Calculation program As an example here we will explain a calculation program that calculates dimensions using the operator D absolute value of the difference and the edges detected by gray checkers No 1 and No 2 The D operator subtracts two values and gives the absolute value of the result CA01 Gray Edge checker No 1 D Gray Edge checker No 2 Procedure 1 Align the cursor to select the register number for the calculation program you are going to create 8 NUMERICAL CALCULATION Program Result J CA S Data Bit CA01 CA04 EAJ 16bit 32bit A Start B Copy C Esc 2 From the state shown in step 1 above press ENTER again A sub window is displayed for selection of parameters to be input 8 NUMERICAL CALCULATION Program Result Jud CAO oo CA0O1 8 keas Data Bit CA01 CA04 ELN 16bit 32bit Next PA EA LI BW GW BE GE FE SM CA OCA QS CV Num Ope With the
117. ails regarding Computer Link mode refer to 16 13 Computer Link 1 Refer to 16 3 1 Serial Command Table Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 2 Communication Settings 16 2 3 RS232C Set the RS232C parameters in order to use serial communication 7 ENVIRONMENT 52 EZES 522 Length 523 Stop Bit 524 Parity 525 Flow Control 521 Baud rate bps Select the transmission speed for communications bps There are 8 transmission speeds available 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 522 Length Select the number of data bits in each byte either 7 or 8 i Note Some computers do not support transmission speeds of 19200bps or greater in some cases communication will not work despite the fact that the settings are available 523 Stop Bit Select the number of stop bits in each byte either 1 or 2 524 Parity Select the type of parity checking to use to check the data The selection options are None Odd or Even 16 10 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 2 Communication Settings 525 Flow Control Set the method of handshake flow control The selection options are None or Xon Xoff Point k What is flow control During high speed serial communication overflow can occur if the receiving device s processing speed cannot keep up with the sending device s transmission speed Flow control is used to prevent this
118. alCommands 16 13 Computer Link 2 645303 223 wad ie a POA BS COUNINOG rss 16 13 2 ConnectiontoaPLC 16 13 3 Communication 00 00 eens 16 13 4 Communication Settings 16 50 16 50 16 50 16 51 16 52 16 52 16 52 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 4 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 1 Communications Function 16 1 Communications Function The Multichecker is equipped with both serial 2 channels and parallel ports With these ports you can control the Multichecker using a PLC or computer The things that can be controlled differ depending on whether you are using serial or parallel communication Parallel Serial Details 2 I O terminal Command Inspection prepara EL tions complete RDY READY Di lete waiting for the next signal ON p start signal Specific substitution STA formula not executed START Start ACK STA START Execute Specific substitution signal c All Autom PU formula executed hold ACK until RDY 16 24 PR 16722 Switch goes off inspection Re inspect E i 6 no image capture c Input image capture not T 16 24 RYR 16 22 executed specified STA a ari IN1 to IN2 Specific substitution S CR Input formula not executed block specified 16 24 2 1 to 3 16 23 STA IN1 to IN2 block specified Start Us
119. allel Output Make the following settings 51 52 53 Com Mode Select Computer Link in the case that you will be using the Computer Link function to communicate with a PLC for example FP Series PLC manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works Otherwise select Normal Mode RS232C Set all items to the same settings as the equipment that you will be communicating with If the settings differ from those of the other equipment communication will not be possible Serial Output If you selected Computer Link as the setting for setting item 51 Com Mode rw refer to 16 13 Computer Link If you selected Normal Mode set the following items Output data Judgment output and numerical calculations Output format Output digits and processing for invalid digits Signals Presence of the image capture complete output Process End RCp and inspection complete output Read End ECp signals 2 Start the inspection Input the following commands in accordance with the application execution mode after confirming that the READY signal has been output from the parallel port inspection preparation complete signal SCp Image capture checker execution specific substitution formula not executed PCp Image capture checker execution specific substitution RCp Checker execution image capture and specific substitution formula not executed Execution mode Execute All Autom Switch SCp Image capture
120. and minimum values CA0 GE02011DGE01011 CA02 CA03 CA04 Data Bit CA01 CA04 AJL 16bit 32bit To Revise a program During Input Procedure 1 Set the numerical calculation program register No use the cursor lever to move the highlight cursor to the incorrect item and press B to delete the item CA01 GE02011 2 GE01011 To add to a program characters are inserted in front of the highlight cursor oy Pel 0 RE ENGEO1011 2 13 15 Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 13 3 Numerical Calculation To Delete a program Procedure 1 Select the register No of the program you want to delete 2 Use the cursors to move the highlight cursor to the location then press B to delete the program CA015GE02011DGE01011 Copying a program In the following example we will copy the program set in CA03 to CA04 Procedure 1 Move the cursor to the register number where you want to create the program and select it Press B to display the Copy Source Number selection window Source No CA 3 Input and confirm the number of the register where the numerical calculation program that you want to copy is stored When you select gg the copy source number the calculation formula stored in the source register is displayed in the destination Data BIT CAUT UAUA el TODIT SZDIT register Source No ory 3 4 If you wish to use the copied numerical calculation program as is press C Return to
121. and set the upper and lower limits for average gray scale value in the inspection area During inspection the average value obtained is judged to see whether or not it is within these limits 8 When required set position and rotation adjustment and exposure adjustment group numbers Gray Scale Window Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 8 2 Gray Scale Window Checker Setup Chapter 9 9 1 9 2 9 3 Binary Edge Checkers Binary Edge Checkers z2 2 rare 9 3 9 1 1 Main Menu au 9 3 9 1 2 Checker Setting 0 2ccceeeeaee 9 4 9 1 3 Select the Adjustment Group 9 7 Binary Edge Checker Setup 000eeeaee 9 8 Restrictions on Binary Edge Checkers 9 9 Binary Edge Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 Multichecker A210 A110 Binary Edge Checkers 9 1 Binary Edge Checkers 9 1 Binary Edge Checkers Binary edge checkers are use binary processing to detect the edge of an object and give the coordinates of the edge detected You can set up to 96 checkers per type for the A210 and up to 48 per type for the A110 9 1 1 Main Menu TYPE 1 34 BINARY EDGE DETECTION Jud HG Ho 1 xis ON A Slice Level Ho A Checker Setting Adj Group Copy Checker Delete Checker No Checker No Set the number of the binary edge checker to be created 1 Select Camera For the A210 select which camera A or B will supply the image on which the binary e
122. are to be processed Object Area Set upper and lower limits The region within this range is treated as the object for inspection The setting range for both the upper and lower limits is 1 to 245760 Filter Select whether or not to perform image erosion or dilation Sorting Select whether or not to sort the detected regions in order of area center X coordinate or center Y coordinate Sorting Order Select whether the result outputs are to be sorted in ascending or descending order Labeling Boundary Labeling This function recognizes individual target objects in the case that multiple target objects exist ON Recognizes individual target objects OFF Recognizes one target object even if there are multiple target objects Boundary This is used to set whether target objects that contact the lines of a region are to be inspected or not ON Inspect OFF Ignore Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker rm For details regarding the Labeling and Boundary functions refer to 17 Feature Extraction Select from among the following three combinations Labeling Boundary OFF ON ON OFF ON ON Multichecker A210 A110 Set and confirm the Slice Level No Set and confirm the Slice Level No for the base checker Slice Level No Set the base position Select and confirm the base position Press A to display the current detection coordinates d
123. before invoking VBT Ver 2 Vision Backup Tool Ver 2 Useful Functions Multichecker A210 A110 15 2 Marker Function 15 2 Marker Function The Marker function allows you to draw lines and shapes such as rectangles and ellipses in the display screen up to a maximum of eight items You can use these marker graphics as guides for positioning objects for inspection To display a marker you must set Marker to On w Refer to 1 3 3 Changing Display Items and 3 3 9 Selecting Initial Display Settings for details To use the Marker function select 3 Checker 8 Marker from Screen Display 8 MARKER A Add B Image OA t Prev A Add Press A to draw a new marker graphic Creating a new marker 1 Press A Add to display the shape selection window 2 Select either Line Rect or Circle 3 Draw the marker wm Refer to 2 11 Checker Area and Marker Area Setting Method for details 15 8 Multichecker A210 A110 Useful Functions 15 2 Marker Function Deleting a marker 1 Select the marker to be deleted Use the cursor lever to select the graphic The currently selected graphic is highlighted displayed more brightly than the rest 8 MARKER A Add B Image LA t Prev Press ENTER to display the setting window and select Del Delete Del A confirmation window will appear asking you to confirm the deletion Select and confirm either Yes delete or No do not delete De
124. cale Edge Checkers 0 0 0 cece cee 10461 MGRUSCRECN case era aes bee eesMurees 10 1 2 Checker Setting wi ccnencvtnrhs wiv ea TOMS Hess Such utes Sono aa a Coe ee ee Ra A eas A 10 2 Gray Scale Edge Checker Setup 0 00 cece nee ees Multichecker A210 A110 Table of Contents Chapter 11 Feature Extraction 111 Feature Extraction ses ae tee u et 11 1 1 Main Menue a Ren 11 1 2 Checker Setting 2 u a 11 1 3 Checker Setting a wire 11 1 4 Select The Adjustment Group sssssssssnrrr eee eee ee 11 1 5 Select The Adjustment Group 0 0 cee eee eee 11 2 Output Values for Detection Results 0 00 eee 11 3 Feature Extraction Setup 0 c cece eee eee Chapter 12 Smart Matching 12 1 Smat Matching 225 2004 2er small 12 121 Men S ren Hs Gren Be 12 1 2 Checker Settings 4 2 ed pee 10 nonr ee ame 12 1 3 Substraction Settings A210 only 0 eee eee 12 1 4 Check Template ur 2 4 Pee ow Oe Se Pe Ps 124 9 Result ee ee 12 2 Smart Matching Checker Setup 222222 sense een ren Chapter 13 Inspection Results and Output 13 1 Inspection Results and Output 00 eee nennen 13 2 Conversion Data pe eee eae eh eee nr 1321 Gonversion Data tr 22h arten ern rien eh ees 13 2 2 Conversion Data Setup 0 c cece eee 13 3 Numerical Calculation 0 ccc ccc teen eee eens 13 3 1 About Numerical Calculations
125. camera related discrepancy between the original type information and the restored type information VBT Ver 2 will not operate properly after that restoration wm See 15 1 Loading and Storing Image Data for additional information Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 17 1 Vision Backup Tool Ver 2 Method for making a forced return from VBT Mode If due to some problem you cannot return from VBT Mode press the A and B buttons on the keypad at the same time to force a return Copying the setting data in the A210 A110V1 to A210 A110V2 You cannot copy the setting data in the A210V1 or A110V1 to the A210V2 or A110V2 using Vision Backup Tool You need to get the special data conversion software that we provide free of charge Please contact us Since you cannot copy the setting data in the A210V1 or A110V1 to the A210V2 or A110V2 using Vision Backup Tool you need to do that using the special data conversion software that we provide free of charge Please contact us to obtain the software The following devices are also required for data conversion A210V1 or A110V1 The setting data are converted while being backed up with the data conversion software The cpm files that have been backed up with the Vision Backup Tool cannot be converted A210V2 or A110V2 A PC in which data conversion software is installed RS 232C cable ANM81103 Refer to the operating instruction for the data converter Readme ixt fo
126. cations Serial and Parallel 16 5 Type Switching 16 5 Type Switchin The following explanation tells you how to switch types using external equipment 16 5 1 Items related to serial parallel communications Parallel Serial Details I O terminal Command Type switch number X CR specification IN1 to 6 TYPE 29 x switch timing 01 to 64 Switch type Confirmation by off to Switching complete on transition of the RDY READY signal Y CR 01 to 64 In the case of the A110 is 01 to 32 16 5 2 Common setting items for serial and parallel 7 ENVIRONMENT E Communication 51 Com Mode Normal Mode 52 RS232C 53 Serial Output 54 Parallel Output 55 Min Ready Off Time Set the following items 55 Min Ready OFF Time 0 to 1000ms in 10ms steps It is possible to use serial or parallel communication to set the minimum time that the Ready signal is off for range O to 1000ms in 10ms steps Use this setting when the inspection execution time is fast the Ready OFF time is short and the external device cannot detect the end of execution The initial setting is Oms The Ready OFF times are applied in all cases except the following Menu selection Switching images or displays by pressing either Bor C Inspection execution initiated using the Start trigger VBT mode 16 31 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16
127. cations Function Parallel Serial Details 2 I O terminal Command Easy mode switching between A IN7 16 46 and B Input Detailed mode IN1 to 2 I2C Camera A or B Thru or Image specification 16 46 0t03 16 45 switching Memory IN7 Switching timing Confirm by RDY ICR Output Switching complete READY signal offto 16 46 for switching with 16 45 on transition Detailed mode only Spreadsheet reset Spreadsheets Output Reset complete hai Direction key pu 8 directions QCR 13 34 STX Keycode ETX Key Emulate ENTER key input STX5ETX STX Keycode ETX ae A Key A B Key B C Key C A B and C key input 16 7 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 2 Communication Settings 16 2 Communication Settings Menu 5 Environment 5 Communication 51 Com Mode 52 RS232C 53 Serial Output 54 Parallel Output 55 Min Ready Off Time 56 Key Emulate In order to control the unit using serial or parallel communication you must first set the communication settings The various menu settings are explained below wm Refer to items 16 5 to 16 11 for further details regarding type switching and template re segmentation for smart matching using communications 16 2 1 7 The Communication Menu ENVIRONMENT 15 _lefJululttsitegtite 51 52 53 54 55 56
128. ch based on sequence that is the number of objects detected in each step Correlation Cor Shows the correlation values of objects detected in each step Rotation settings Angle range Angle After an object has been detected based on the correlation value the Imagechecker rotates the template within the angle range set in the rotation settings 30 and detects the object s rotation angle Accuracy Acc Set the minimum unit for rotating the template when performing angle detection Use the cursor lever to select the angle to one decimal place The Imagechecker rotates the template at each angle set here compares it to the object and finally detects the rotation angle 12 6 Multichecker A210 A110 Smart Matching 12 1 Smart Matching A v Example When no rotation angle is set angle range 0 Multi Checker A200 Ver 1 2 TYPE 1 37 SMART MATCHING Jud 30K Ho 1 Detected 3 gt 3Up sDown Ho Co X Co Y Theta Sub Area Corre 1 110 9 362 7 0 0 0 0 99 00 oj 0 0 R Test B Pos Dsp al N A a Example When a rotation angle is set angle range 10 accuracy 1 Multi Checker A200 Ver 1 2 TYPE L 1 37 SHART HATCHING Jud 30K Ho i Detected 3 gt 3Up Down No X Sub Area Corre WW B Pos Dsp CzEsc 12 7 Smart Matching Multichecker A210 A110 12 1 Smart Matching IE Notes Search accuracy The search accuracy o
129. checker MT matching in the case of the A110 BW binary window checker CA numerical calculation GW gray scale window checker OCA previous numerical calculation result BE binary edge checker JR judgment output R register GE gray scale edge checker JD judgment output D register Operators The following operators are used Symbol Reading Content Inclusive OR When either of the results is 1 the result output is 1 AND When both of the results are 1 the result output is 1 Exclusive OR When the two results are different the result output is 1 NOT 1 and 0 results are inverted In this table 1 represents OK and 0 represents NG In the following situations the result of judgment is ER When the checker referred to produced an error When achecker specified in the judgment program could not be referenced This occurs when for instance the checker is deleted after the judgment program is set up and working properly 13 24 Multichecker A210 A110 Optional Memory 13 4 Judgment Output NG Operation When a NG result is generated in a Judgment register i e the conditions were not satisfied you can execute one of the two functions described below Trap or NG Display Each type can only be set in some registers and if you execute a data save the settings will be stored even if the power is switched off 1
130. checker Vertical detection rotation adjustment A210 only Binary edge checkers are used as the base checkers and the amount of adjustment AY A6 angle of rotation is calculated from the results of two vertical checkers Shapes available are lines and planes with a mixture of the two being possible Since the amount of adjustment is calculated from the results of two base checkers the reference position cannot be set unless two checkers are set The reference point is the centre point of the coordinate obtained by checker 1 and the coordinate obtained by checker 2 aa Ta Reference Detection Detection Position Potision Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 2 The Various Modes for Position Rotation Adjustment Checkers Gray scale edge checker Position adjustment Gray edge checkers are used as the base checkers calculating adjustments AX and AY from the results of vertical and horizontal scanning checkers Shapes available are lines and planes with a mixture of the two being possible There is no need to set both the horizontal and vertical base checkers if not required If only one is set the adjustment in that direction will be calculated If both checkers are set the order of priority can be specified Edge detection is performed in Front detection position mode The reference point is the intersection between vertical and horizontal lines passing through the coordinate obtained by the horizon
131. checker the edge detection position is on the top of the checker when scanning in the horizontal direction and on the left ofthe checker when scanning in a vertical direction The distance between the reference point and the detection point is the amount of adjustment Vertical checker Reference point Horizontal checker Reference point Detection position Detection position Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 2 The Various Modes for Position Rotation Adjustment Checkers Binary edge checker Horizontal detection rotation adjustment A210 only Binary edge checkers are used as the base checkers and the amount of adjustment AX 49 angle of rotation is calculated from the results of two horizontal checkers Shapes available are lines and planes with a mixture of the two being possible Since the amount of adjustment is calculated from the results of two base checkers the reference position cannot be set unless two checkers are set The reference point is the centre point of the coordinate obtained by checker 1 and the coordinate obtained by checker 2 Binary edge checker 1 for reference Binary edge checker 2 for reference Base checker 1 Detection position Reference point Base checker 2 Detection position Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 2 The Various Modes for Position Rotation Adjustment Checkers Binary edge
132. cker 000 4 19 4 3 1 Setting a Position Adjustment Checker that uses Binary Edge Detection 000 c cece eee 4 19 4 3 2 Setting a Horizontal Vertical Detection Rotation Adjustment Checker that uses Binary Edge Detection A210 only 4 23 4 3 3 Setting a Position Adjustment Checker that uses Gray Scale Edge Detection sree Wg ee Soka ce eect dod wade an 4 27 4 3 4 Setting a Horizontal Detection Rotation Adjustment Checker or a Vertical Detection Rotation Adjustment Checker that uses Gray Edge Detection A210 only 0 2 cee eee eee 4 31 4 3 5 Setting One Checker Position Adjustment Checker that uses Feature Extraction 0 c eee 4 35 4 3 6 Setting a Theta Rotation Adjustment Checker that uses Feature Extraction A210 only 4 39 4 3 7 Setting One Checker and Two Checker Rotation Adjustment Checkers that use Feature Extraction A210 only 4 43 4 3 8 Setting One Checker Position Adjustment that uses Matching 4 48 4 3 9 Setting Theta Rotation Adjustment that uses Matching A210 only 00 nee eee eee 4 52 4 3 10 Setting One Checker Rotation Adjustment and Two Checker Rotation Adjustment that uses Matching A210 only 4 56 4 4 Position Adjustment Groups 2 000 nenene 4 60 Chapter 5 Exposure Adjustment 5 1 Exposure Adjustment 4 2 220 nee holed ceed Hin ea 5 1 1 Mai Men tits ec eeeu tise teri rn sane Med EAE AA R 5 1
133. d for details on how to create a area i Note Circular elliptical areas must be set so that the difference between the X coordinate start point and end point is an odd number of pixels 7 Select Mask Shape from the menu and set or confirm the mask shape as a rectangle circle or polygon 8 Select Mask Area from the menu and set the coordinates for the mask area mw See 2 12 Setting Masking for details on how to set the mask area 9 Select Object from the menu and set or confirm the colour to be extracted as white or black 10 Select Filter from the menu and set or confirm whether to apply dilation or erosion processing 11 Select Area Judgment from the menu and set the upper and lower limits referring to the area size values displayed at the top of the screen 12 Setthe numbers of the position and rotation adjustment group and the exposure adjustment group Chapter 8 8 1 8 2 Gray Scale Window Checkers Gray Scale Window Checkers 2 22 8 3 8 1 1 Menu Screen 0 cee cee 8 3 8 1 2 Checker Setting 0 200ce eee eee 8 4 Gray Scale Window Checker Setup 8 5 Gray Scale Window Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 Multichecker A210 A110 Gray Scale Window Checkers 8 1 Gray Scale Window Checkers 8 1 Gray Scale Window Checkers Gray scale window checkers are used for calculating the average value for gray scale brightness data within an area You can
134. der the following conditions When you switch the power off When you switch to Camera mode Camera Settings or change the shutter speed When you change the Image Data Save settings When you delete initialize or copy a type Initialize the Environment settings When you switch the capture camera setting to a different type mw Refer to 15 1 Loading and Storing Image Data for details 3 16 Multichecker A210 A110 Environment and Type 3 2 Environment Settings Environment settings common for all types 3 2 9 Initialize This returns the Environment settings to the original factory settings The Language setting is not initialized even if you initialize so the currently displayed language remains the selected language re Note If you change settings in the Environment menu select Save Data from the main menu and save Note that if the power is turned off and you have not saved your data the setting changes will be lost 3 17 Environment and Type Multichecker A210 A110 3 3 Types 3 3 Types You can register a maximum of 64 sets of inspection condition data for the A210 in the controller 32 for the A110 This inspection data is called a TYPE and each type is managed by giving it a title The Type screen allows you to switch between types copy or delete them and set how to display them 3 3 1 Menu Screen TYPE 1 1 TYPE Rest 432520 NE 01 Copy Type Delete Type
135. device w Refer to 16 6 Saving Type Data for details i Note Note that if you set Last store type No the type number at the last point at which the data was saved is the active type number If you set No 7 No 1 will still start up even if there is no No 1 type data 41 Display Message This can only be displayed when Last store type No is set as the Start Type setting If you set Yes when the type switch is executed a message saying Data changed but not saved is displayed on the screen when the switch to the different type is complete If you set No the message above is not displayed In addition if No 1 is set as the Start Type the message is not displayed 3 12 Multichecker A210 A110 Environment and Type 3 2 6 3 2 Environment Settings Environment settings common for all types Communication Set serial parallel or other communications 7 ENVIRONMENT 5 _Kefefulultioitezuiteln 51 Com Mode Normal Mode 52 RS232C 53 Serial Output 54 Perallel Output 55 Min Ready OFF Time 51 52 53 54 55 Communications Mode Select either Normal Mode or Computer Link as the communications mode RS232C Serial Output rm Refer to 16 2 Communications Settings for detals Parallel Output Min Ready OFF Time 0 to 1000ms in 10ms steps It is possible to use serial or parallel communication to set the minimum time that the Ready signal is off for range O to 1000ms in 10m
136. dge checker is to be activated This is fixed at A in the case of the A110 2 Slice Level No Select the binary level group for the binary edge checker being created 3 Checker Setting Create the binary edge checker and set parameters etc 4 Adjustment Group Set the adjustment checker that will adjust the binary edge checker to be created 5 Copy Checker When creating a checker copy the data from an existing checker 6 Delete Checker Delete the checker Judgment Shows OK if an edge is detected but NG if no edge is detected X Y detection coordinates The coordinates of the edge detected are displayed Binary Edge Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 9 1 Binary Edge Checkers 9 1 2 31 32 Checker Setting TYPEL 1 34 BINARY EDGE DETECTION Jud HG Ho 1 Kiss Or RO EMMMChecker Setting Bi Shape Plane 32 Area 206 200 305 279 33 Direction Hor 34 Edge Condition H gt EB 35 Filter 3 36 Hidth 5 Shape Select the shape for the checker area Area Create or move the checker area Direction 33 34 35 36 Set the scanning direction when plane scanning is selected for the shape Direction cannot be set when line scanning is selected Edge Condition Select whether an edge is detected when white changes to black or when black changes to white in the image under inspection The judgment results and detected edge coordinates are displayed in the upper right portion of
137. diepiay binary through A B C D E F Gray NG Binary NG A B C D E F i 3 Gray scale 8bit 256 gradations rocessin g Binarization 6 groups of binary processing from the gray scale memory upper and lower threshold settings Number of types 64 Types 32 Types Execution mode specification Execute All execute all set checkers Autom Switch Switch and execute checkers based on judgment output results User Defined Specify and execute checker at start input Inspection 96 type max 48 type max Position Position and rotation adjustment function X Y position adjustment function position and rotation SOT z adjustment Priority adjustment Multi stage adjustment Sequence setting by matching gray scale edge binary edge or feature extraction detection 96 type max 48 type max Exposure Saree at z adjustment Shape rectangular Binarization adjusts according to changes in the gray scale data Gray scale mean value detection judgement Smart matching matching sub pixel processing Smart matching 96 type max Equipped with post detection differential processing function Matching 48 type max Sub pixel accurate multiple detection matching by gray scale correlation processing Rotation by raster detection and raster detection position 30 degrees Output number of detected items correlation numbers position angle Teaching registered changes can be imported from external source Sma
138. digits B on D off Execute All 1 B 2 3 B Press Next to change the screen and display the next 10 items 13 36 Multichecker A210 A110 Optional Memory 13 6 Data Monitor Changing the maximum and minimum values from the Data Monitor TYPE 1 Pagei lt Hide Next WIDTH1 0 NG HIGHT 0 NG Change Max Min Min 100 Judgment output judgment result Maximum and minimum value setting window for WIDTH1 Press ENTER with the register title highlighted to display the setting window for the maximum and minimum values and use this to make the settings It is also possible to use the Lock function to prevent the maximum and minimum values from being able to be changed i Note Refer to 1 3 3 Changing Display Items and 3 3 9 Selecting Initial Display Settings for details 13 37 Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 13 6 Data Monitor 13 6 2 Data Monitor display setting procedure The following example shows how to select data for display and set a title Up to five items of data can be set for each screen The relationship between the setting screen and the Data Monitor display screen is as follows mcr tie screen gt lt Data Monitor eer screen gt Cra Perser Fee zer Setting new display items Procedure 1 Select 4 Data Monitor from the menu and confirm the selection TYPE 1 4 DATA MONITOR Page 1 Upper lt gt Page Use the arrows to change the screen and di
139. djustment A210 only Gray scale edge checkers are used as the base checkers and the amount of adjustment AY AB angle of rotation is calculated from the results of two vertical checkers Shapes available are lines and planes with a mixture of the two being possible Since the amount of adjustment is calculated from the results of two base checkers the reference position cannot be set unless two checkers are set Edge detection is performed in Front detection position mode The reference point is the centre point of the coordinate obtained by checker 1 and the coordinate obtained by checker 2 Base Base Checker1 Checker2 Reference point Detection Detection Position Position Feature extractor One checker position adjustment The amount of adjustment AX AY can be calculated from the results of using a single feature extractor as the base checker Only rectangle can be set as the shape The reference point is the position of the centre of gravity obtained by the feature extractor Any point can be selected from a maximum of 10 detection results Reference point 4 10 Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 2 The Various Modes for Position Rotation Adjustment Checkers Feature extractor Theta rotation adjustment A210 only The amount of adjustment AX AY AB can be calculated from the results of using a single feature extractor as the base checker Only rectangle can be set as the shape
140. djustment No 1 1 Follow up Adjustment for Group No 1 Position adjustment No 2 1 Follow up Adjustment for Group No 2 Position adjustment No 3 No 2 is adjusted in accordance with the amount of movement of No 1 and No 3 is adjusted in accordance with the amount of movement of No 2 By setting the position adjustments in this way it is possible to have a position adjustment checker based on the results of an earlier position adjustment checker multiple position adjustment i Note If you want to adjust position adjustments i e to nest position adjustments ensure that the later adjuster specifies a group number lower than its own number Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 4 Position Adjustment Groups Multiple Position Rotation Adjustment Checker Settings A210 only With the A210 it is possible to set multiple Position Rotation Adjustment checkers for one image The Position Rotation Adjustment checkers are executed in order from the smallest checker number Set a checker in Rotation Adjustment mode and set a Position Adjustment mode checker to follow this With this type of setting it is possible to adjust following checkers by the movement adjustment AX and AY and the rotation adjustment AB Procedure 1 Create Position Rotation Adjustment checker No 1 2 Create a Gray Edge Vertical Detection Rotation Adjustment checker 3 Set the Reference checker area and c
141. e Complete signal R Process End Select whether or not to perform serial output of the Inspection Complete signal E Numerical Calc Select whether or not to perform serial output of results of numerical calculations Judgment Select whether or not to perform serial output of the judgment results 16 12 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 2 Communication Settings 16 2 5 Serial Output Settings Computer Link Select the data signals and format for performing serial communication using Computer Link 7 ENVIRONMENT 153 EENEIKSIT ING 0 532 Top Data Register 0 533 Timeout 5000ms 534 Output 16bit 535 Numerical Calc None 536 Judgment None 537 PLC Type MEW FP 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 eS Note Type No Register Specify the PLC register number in the range 0 to 9999 When the TYPE signal is input the type is switched to the number that corresponds to the value stored in the register number specified here Example If the type register setting is 1 and the value stored in register DT1 is 5 then when the TYPE signal is input the type will be switched to No 5 Top Data Register Set the top register number for use when outputting data to PLC The setting range is O to 9999 Timeout Set the maximum time to wait for a response after outputting data to the PLC or after requesting a type switching number Output Set the bit
142. e cleared Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 4 Next perform the checker settings Select Checker Setting to display the setting menu 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 Matching One Chkr Pos 2 Checker Setting 21 Template IK 22 Search Aree 0 0 511 479 23 Sequence 24 Output Unit 25 Check Template 21 Template 22 Search Area 23 Sequence 24 Output Unit 25 Check Template Set each of the items For details regarding the settings refer to 12 1 2 Checker Setting and 12 1 4 Check Template in 12 Smart Matching Note however there is no Rotation Setting in Sequence and no Theta setting in the Sorting item of Output Unit Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 5 Set the base position Select Base Pos and press the A Test key to display the current detection coordinates detection angles and correlation values a maximum of five 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 Matching One Chkr Pos 3 Base Position No Go cov mere T core A Test B Pos Dsp C Esc Select the appropriate position from the table and press the ENTER key The coordinates that you select are registered as the base position When you return to the setting menu the adjustment amounts AX AY and 490 are displayed at the top right of the screen Press the B k
143. e switching switch timing is by TYP signal input IN1 to 7 Smart Matching Checker No specifi cation register for template reregistra tion A210 Smart Match ing No 01 to 96 A110 Smart Match ing No 01 to 48 IN1 to 2 Camera Image specification when the display camera switch setting is De tails The IN7 function changes depending on the Environment Parallel Settings selection If Template Reregisteration is set to No IN7 is used to switch the camera display IN1 to IN6 can be used for template reregistration IN8 Template reregistra tion timing 16 20 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 4 Inspection Execution and Result Output Procedures 16 4 Inspection Execution and Result Output Procedures This section explains how to initiate an inspection and output results using communications 16 4 1 Inspection preparation complete Details Inspection prepara tions complete waiting for the next start signal Parallel Items related to serial parallel communications Serial I O terminal RDY READY signal ON Command Specific substitution formula not executed STA START SCR Start Execute All Autom Switch Specific substitution formula executed ACK STA START signal hold ACK until RDY goes off PCR inspection Re inspect image capture not executed IN6 no
144. e cursor lever Press ENTER to set the binarization levels If you press C before you confirm with ENTER the settings will be lost and will return to their original values 5 Ifyou are changing binarization levels in the same binary level group repeat steps 3 and 4 If you are changing binarization levels for a different binary level group repeat steps 1 through 4 6 After making the settings return to the main screen by pressing C Reference and modify the slice level from an external device Using serial commands it is possible to reference and modify the slice level w Refer to 16 9 Referencing and Changing Maximum Minimum Slice Level Values for details 2 18 Multichecker A210 A110 Inspection Procedure 2 6 Slice Levels Binarization Levels Hint Gray scale processing and binarization In the A210 A110 the image signal from the camera is stored in the memory in the form of a gray scale image i e a set of image data including brightness data with 256 gradations The A210 A110 has a memory comprising 480 x 512 pixels each using 8 data bits to represent 256 gray scale gradations Gray scale processing is employed by the A210 A110 Multichecker for high precision character verification The gray scale image is converted directly into brightness data data concerning conditions and differentials in changes in brightness values which is then processed Because gray scale processing uses brightness data directly it not
145. e displayed on the monitor at one time either Count Average and Variance or Max Value Min Value and Range To switch the display move the cursor to the reference checker location and use the cursor arrow buttons to change 5 Page Move the cursor to this location and then use the cursor lever to open the spreadsheets page The spreadsheets can reference up to 40 checkers but only five can be displayed at one time on the screen Therefore it is comprised of eight pages A Start Press A to capture an image perform an inspection and output parallel and serial signals in accordance with I O settings B Reset All values are reset to 0 Select Yes to reset all values select No or press C to abort reset C Esc Press C to return to the main menu 13 34 Multichecker A210 A110 Optional Memory 13 5 Spreadsheets eS Note The number of scans is the total number of starts on the type being displayed The number of OK and NG outputs will count the data after the checker item is designated Consequently the OK count and the NG count will not necessarily equal the Total scan times In addition if the result is ERR only the number of errors is counted and the NG data is not updated Spreadsheets can be operated for each type This data is cleared when you switch types or switch off the power Note that the displayed value is reset when you switch the type The result
146. e registration is executed at the position set for the template area Because position adjustment and smart matching are not executed re registration is not performed if the object or template image positions have moved Execution position Re registration is executed at the detected position after smart matching is executed Because position adjustment is not executed re registration is not performed if the object position has moved If the template could not be detected when smart matching was executed due to the template image and re registration image being different etc an error is generated and re registration is cancelled Adjustment position Position adjustment is executed and re registration is performed after the smart matching is adjusted Smart matching is not executed so the positional correlation between the search area when the area was set and the template area is maintained and the image at this position is re registered as the template 16 36 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 7 Template Smart matching Re registration 16 7 3 Re registration Method Specifying the Smart Matching No Subtract 1 from the actual inspection checker number convert to BIN data and specify on IN1 to IN7 In the case of the A110 specify data in IN1 to IN6 Matching No 1 to 48 i Note With the A210 this is IN1 to IN6 if 544 Chg Camera Display is set w Refer to 16 2 6 Parallel O
147. ected from the Main menu Numerical Calculation Judgment and spreadsheets menus i Note Test inspections are only performed to check how inspections run with particular settings and parameters For ordinary inspections we recommend that you input the start signal from an external device from the main menu 2 12 Multichecker A210 A110 Inspection Procedure 2 4 Hiding Images and Menus 2 4 Hiding Images and Menus Menu display when a checker number is being selected If you select a number for a checker that has already been set the settings are displayed and the checker pattern is displayed brightly If you select a number for a checker that has not been set the settings are not displayed Hiding Images and Menus When you select and confirm a checker number the setup menu for each checker is displayed The Hide Image and Hide Menu functions are available only when you are working in this menu Use the cursor lever to toggle between displaying and hiding the image or the menu Hide menu Hide image Multi Checker ee Ver 1 0 Hulti Checker A200 Ver 1 0 3h ree o jud Land NG mp3 o 1 31 He hae cot no a tan Be Got NG Cnt o sel 1 ame Slice Level No A Slice Level Ho a Dot Ji eer 1 D Dot Judgment lt 7666 gt Land x gue y Land Judgment lt 2555 0 Ad Ww Adj Group Copy Che Copy Checker Delete het Delete Checker While the image is suppressed a highlighted H
148. ection Procedure 2 6 Slice Levels Binarization Levels A Point When this menu is displayed images become binary images If you are displaying a live image the image is made binary based on the cur rent camera image If you set the slice level when Display Memory Image is selected you can ad just the slice level based on the image in the gray memory so if you are adjust ing the slice level of an object that is moving it is convenient to make the adjust ment after displaying the memory image J Rx Br 2 17 Inspection Procedure Multichecker A210 A110 2 6 Slice Levels Binarization Levels Slice Level Setup Procedure 1 Switch the image displayed on the monitor as required 2 Use the cursor lever to move the cursor to the position for slice level group A to F 3 Move the cursor with the cursor lever and press ENTER at the upper or lower limit value and proceed with entry mode You cannot make the upper limit value lower than the lower limit value Similarly you cannot make the lower limit value larger than the upper limit value If you want to make the upper limit value a level lower than the current lower limit value first lower the lower limit value and then set the upper limit value If you want to change the lower limit value to a level higher than the current upper limit value first raise the upper limit value and then set the lower limit value 4 Change the binary level values using th
149. ection adjustment checker lt adjustment source gt lt adjustment destination gt 1 01 to 32 01 to 32 1 01 to 16 01 to 16 2 33 to 64 gt 3310 64 2 17 to 32 17 to 32 3 65 to 96 N 65 to 96 3 33 to 48 33 to 48 It is not possible to adjust in a direction for which there is no arrow shown lt Adjustment group numbers that can be set for the checker numbers gt The A110 values are in brackets Checker No 01 to 32 01 to 16 lt Block No 1 gt 33 to 64 17 to 32 lt Block No 2 gt 65 to 96 33 to 48 lt Block No 3 gt Adjustment group numbers that can be set 01 to 32 01 to 16 lt Block No 1 gt 01 to 32 33 to 64 01 to 16 17 to 32 lt Block No 1 and 2 gt 01 to 32 65 to 96 01 to 16 33 to 48 lt Block No 1 and 3 gt Inspection Procedure Multichecker A210 A110 2 8 Specifying the Exposure Adjustment Group 2 8 Specifying the Exposure Adjustment Group Within a type it is possible to specify the number of the exposure adjuster to be applied The group number is only displayed for exposure adjusters which have the group number already specified When selecting a number the pattern for the corresponding adjuster is displayed brightly If the exposure adjuster group is set to upper limit the upper limit for binarization is adjusted and if it is set to lower limit the lower limit for binarization is adjusted It is possible to set bo
150. ects in the area is measured and centre of gravity coordinate data and principal axis data are measured at the same time If Labeling is set to No Perim Proj obtain perimeter and projection width is also set to No The Boundary parameter is also invalid Labeling No The three objects are handled as one and the overall area is obtained Labeling Yes The three objects are handled as one and the area and perimeter length of each is obtained 11 6 Multichecker A210 A110 Feature Extraction 362 363 11 1 Feature Extraction Boundary If boundary processing is set to Off then lands encroaching on the specified boundary area are not extracted as objects If boundary processing is set to On then the lands in the boundary area are also extracted In this case the area of the land within the inspection area has to meet the extraction conditions When set to Off shape change and mask shape cannot be specified lt Boundary Off Objects detected 2 Boundary On Object detected 4 Labeling must be set to Yes Perimeter and Projection Width Perim Proj Select whether or not to measure the perimeter lengths of individual lands or to measure the size of the rectangle which circumscribes each land If labeling is set to No Perim Proj cannot be set to Yes ar Vy f Projected width in the Y axis ha k Projected width in the X axis Circumscribed rectangle for the lan 11 7 Feature Ext
151. ecution Modes for details regarding the execution modes The details for each block are as follows Checker Number A210 A110 01 to 32 01 to 16 33 to 64 17 to 32 65 to 96 33 to 48 Environment and Type Multichecker A210 A110 3 3 Types 3 3 11 Initializing All Type Data Returns all type settings to the original factory settings Note that if you select this all the product data you have entered will be deleted Procedure 1 Select Initialize all Types and confirm 2 Amessage saying CAREFUL Type data will be lost OK is displayed Enter YES to delete all types Enter NO to go back without deleting re Note After executing nitialize all Types if no type is set you will not return to the main menu Enter a type number and press ENTER to set a type Chapter 4 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 1 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 3 4 2 The Various Modes for Position Rotation Adjustment Checkers 4 5 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 4 19 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 3 4 4 3 5 4 3 6 4 3 7 4 3 8 4 3 9 4 3 10 Setting a Position Adjustment Checker that uses Binary Edge Detection 4 19 Setting a Horizontal Vertical Detection Rotation Adjustment Checker that uses Binary Edge Detection A210 only 22 2 4 23 Setting a Position Adjustment Checker that uses Gray Scale Edge Detection 4 27
152. ed with Coefficient 5 Select Base then run a test to obtain the average gray scale value Select Base then press ENTER and the reference gray scale value is displayed as Press A Test The reference gray scale value is displayed by a test Press ENTER to set this value as the reference gray scale value Press C to cancel without setting the gray scale value Note When the test is conducted the reference gray scale value is set by executing at the position after adjustment by position and rotation adjusters If the adjustment takes part of the exposure adjuster area outside the screen area the error message Area protrudes outside screen is displayed I Note A reference gray scale value must be set If areference gray scale value is not set exposure adjuster setup cannot be completed If you press C Esc without setting a reference gray scale value the following message is displayed No base shades is registered Cancel YES If you select Yes the settings will be lost and the exposure adjuster deleted If you select No set a reference gray scale value by selecting Base Multichecker A210 A110 Exposure Adjustment 5 2 Exposure Adjustment Setup 6 Select Average Judgment and set the upper and lower limits for the average gray scale values taken into the setting area Ifthe average gray value captured is outside this range the judgment will be NG Set the upper and lower limits with
153. els Binarization Levels About the binarization Threshold values are applied to a 256 gradation gray scale image to convert it into a 2 gradation black and white image called a binarized or binary image Making binarization level settings means setting upper and lower limit values defining white and black as shown in the diagrams below Because the image is sliced into black and white sections the binarization level settings are also called slice level settings 255 2555 20 255 100 100 10 Upper limit value 255 Upper limit value 100 Upper limit value 200 Lower limit value 100 Lower limit value 0 Lower limit value 100 With the A210 A110 you can create four groups from A to F with upper and lower binarization limit values for each type Each level can be set to a value between 0 and 255 By changing a binarization level for one of the groups in this screen the binary level for each of the binary checkers belonging to the same group is changed Slice level setting menu TYPE 1 2 SLICE LEVEL B Inage CsEsc 1 Ato F Binary Group Shows the six binary level groups ABCDEF You can set binarization levels for each of them individually 2 Maximum Minimum Sets the upper and lower limit value for the slice level 3 B Image The B button switches the image displayed on the monitor between Binary Through and Binary Memory 2 16 Multichecker A210 A110 Insp
154. en are displayed and you can specify the gray scale value of this area 0 to 255 P gt If you are using a gray checker the specified gray scale value is displayed but if you are using a binary checker the area will be black or white according to the slice level that has been set 63 Language Switches the menu display language Japanese or English 3 14 Multichecker A210 A110 Environment and Type 3 2 Environment Settings Environment settings common for all types 3 2 8 Save Image Mode Allows you to set up how images are stored The maximum number of images that can be stored is 30 for the A210 and 8 for the A110 If you select Continuity Trap or Lim Cond as the save mode you can select Overwrite Yes or No for the stored image memory for all of the save modes Save Image Mode Continuity Trap Lin Cond Manual Current Memory Image is stored using the keypad Continuity Stores the image for every inspection Trap Stores the image when the result in the register set for Trap in Judgment is NG i e when the trap condition is established When the Save Image Mode is set to Trap processing is not interrupted even if the trap condition is established However if Overwrite is set to No processing is interrupted at the point when the limit for the number of images that can be stored is exceeded and the trap conditions are established and an error message is displayed on
155. enu for position adjustment using binary edge detection is displayed Use Select Camera to select the camera and Delete Checker to delete the checker as required TYPE 1 1 POS ROT ADJ 3 14 No 1 Binary Edge Pos Adj 9 1 elect Camera Horizontal Checker Vertical Checker Priority Slice Level No Base Pos m PERLE Pos Rot Adj Group Delete Checker 1 Select Camera Select either the camera A or camera B image for operating the Position Adjustment checker 2 Horizontal Checker 3 Vertical Checker Use these to create the checker and set items such as the scan conditions 4 Priority Use this to specify which checker result is to have priority as necessary either vertical or horizontal 5 Slice Level No Select the Slice Level No for the base checker 6 Base Pos Execute a test to register the base position for adjustment 7 Pos Rot Adj Group Set which checker is to be used for adjustment in the case that you are using multiple settings for position and rotation adjustment Select a group number rm Refer to 4 4 Position Adjustment Groups for details 8 Delete Checker Use this to delete a checker In the case that you have created both vertical and horizontal checkers select which one you want to delete Delete Checker Both Hor Only Ver Only Note If you delete a Position Adjustment Checker the inspection results for all checkers that fol
156. environmental temperatures that exceed a range of O Cto 50 C Locations with a relative humidity exceeding a range of 35 RH to 75 RH or that are subject to condensation due to dramatic temperature fluctuations Locations with an atmosphere containing corrosive gases or flammable gases Locations that subject the main unit to direct vibration or impact Locations with a lot of fine particles iron filings or salt Locations likely to have contact with water oil or chemicals Locations with an atmosphere likely to contain organic solvents such as benzine paint thinner and alcohol as well as strongly alkaline materials such as ammonia and caustic soda Static Electricity In a dry environment there is a risk of accumulation of static electricity so when there is a need to touch the equipment users should always discharge the accumulated static by touching an earthed part of the equipment first Cleaning Do not use thinners or similar solvents as they may dissolve parts of the unit and cause colors to run Power Use an insulated power source with built in protection circuits The controller power unit uses non insulted circuits so if an irregular voltage is applied there is a danger that the internal circuitry will be damaged If you use a power source that does not use protection circuits supply the power via a fuse or other protective device Power Sequence Arrange the power sequence so that the controller power source is tur
157. er __ Specific substitution IN6 STA 16 24 P CR PET Derined npu formula executed START signal 7 1 to 3 specified hold ACK until RDY inspection SS IN1 to IN2 Block specification block specified oe Re inspect R YR Input image capture not IN6 reinspect speci 16 24 2 1 to 3 16 23 j fied K executed STA Image Image capture only REN c capture Output 16 29 RYR 16 23 complete complete REND Inspection complete c Output before data output ee a 16223 D1 to D8 For D9 and after handshaking Output Output Judgment output using the ACK signal 16 25 16 23 inspection and the STROBE sig data nal is required 002148030912Cp D1 to D8 Handshaking ene i f using the ACK signal R ete Output Numerical data and the STROBE sig 16 27 16 23 nal is required 16 5 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 1 Slice Level No Group Input Communications Function Details Refer to max and min limits Parallel Serial I O terminal Output Response to refer ence Input Output Change max and min limits Change complete Command L2CR 1 to 6 16 48 L n noR 1 to 6 16 48 T n nCR 1 to 6 T n nCR 1 to 6 16 49 Gray Scale Edge Threshold Smart Matching checker Re registra tion Input
158. er but it is also possible to use Autom Switch Automatic Switch mode and User Defined mode to change the checker to be executed according to certain conditions Multichecker A210 A110 Inspection Procedure 2 2 1 Execution Process Order Start signal input Y Ready signal OFF Y Res Inspection time measurement starts result when the reset condition is set to Off Before Read ets the parallel output previous Y Image captured res set Resets the parallel output previous R output REND signal ON ult when the reset condition is to OFF After Read Y Position and rotation adjustmenter executes Y rotation adjuster Exposure adjustment checker executes Y Inspection checker executes Y Numerical calculation executes Y Judgment executes 2 2 Inspection Execution Procedures Y Spreadsheets Y Parallel data output Y E output No output when the Process End is set to None Y Serial output Y Inspection time measurement completed Y Exposure adjustment is not REND signal OFF applied to the position and Y Ready signal ON Inspection Procedure Multichecker A210 A110 2 2 Inspection Execution Procedures 2 2 2 Execution Modes You can select fr
159. er that you have input move the cursor to Del at the top right of the window and press ENTER this deletes one character A B C D E F G H Space DE tis Ki L mnlolpl7 se 0 I OIENIBEILIEIKIEIKZEZKHEN KZEIENEZEIESEIEEEIEIENEN l li l l oleh _____Inputis completed Input is completed 4 When you have completed input move the cursor to Input is Completed and press ENTER A B C D E F G H Space Del__ i s k L Min o P 7 8 9 7 PATRI S TU Ev wix 4 s 6 yiz elsi 1 2 3 ic gt Js s ole Input is completed The title is displayed to the right of the type number at the top of the screen ABC in this case TYPE 1 sABC Rest 31048352 i TYPE Multichecker A210 A110 Environment and Type 3 3 Types 3 3 4 Setthe Capture Camera Set the image capture camera for each type fixed at A for the A110 Two cameras can be connected to the A210 camera A and camera B so select from among the following five possibilities A Capture images with camera A only don t capture with camera B Checkers set for camera B do not scan B Capture images with camera B only don t capture with camera A Checkers set for camera A do not scan AB Capture images with both cameras A and B simultaneously AB Vertical Camera A captures the left half of the image and camera B captures the right half and the image is composed as amemory camera A image Only the checker
160. er to 13 3 4 Symbols used by Numerical Calculation Programs for the various checker items that can be used in calculations Operators and symbols that can be used for calculations are as follows Addition Left brace Subtraction Right brace Multiplication sin Division cos amp Atan Root Distance T Subtraction absolute D 13 8 Multichecker A210 A110 Optional Memory 13 3 Numerical Calculation Output control function Use this when there are calculation result registers with numerical values and judgment results that you do not want to output using parallel or serial communications mw Refer to page 13 17 Setting and Canceling Output Control a Example 1 CA01 X direction distance CA02 Y direction distance CA03 angle calculated using CA01 and CA02 When using several formulas to calculate the final result an angle in the case above you can use this function to output the final result only A Example 2 XCA01 X direction distance output suppressed XCA02 Y direction distance output suppressed CA03 angle calculated using CA01 and CA02 When output control is set for CA01 and CAO2 only the CA03 result is externally output Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 13 3 Numerical Calculation Specific substitution function When a specific substitution is specified the numerical calculations are only executed when there is a specific start s
161. era Gray Mem Gray NG Binary Thru A Binary Mem A Binary NG A Disp Image B Camera Gray Mem Gray NG Binary Thru A Binary Mem A Binary NG A Disp Image A AB Vertical AB Horizontal A Camera B Camera Gray Mem Binary Thru AB Binary Mem AB C D E F C D E F Multichecker A210 A110 Environment and Type 3 3 Types Notes Select either Mem Image or NG Image gray binary for inspection execution for Thru Image display regardless of whether the standard camera or the double speed random camera is used the image capture execution time will be longer than normal When Start Trigger is set to YES or User Defined Mode is selected Gray NG and Binary NG cannot be selected the selection branches are not displayed If you select a NG image and then set Start Trigger to YES the following message will be displayed If you select YES the image will be switched to a Gray Mem or Binary Mem image Not valid for NG display or Execution Mode User Defined Change these types YES NO Environment and Type Multichecker A210 A110 3 3 Types 3 3 6 Switching Between Types Procedure 1 Enter the type number for the type you want to switch to and press C and the type is switched and you return to the main menu eS Notes If you selected Yes in the Environment menu for the data change message Display Message a message saying Data changed but not saved is disp
162. era type and shutter speed T4 Time from the output of results to the STROB turning on Ims max To Timeout time Td Delay time Includes signal confirmation time Set To timeout time and Td delay time in the Paral lel Output in the Environment menu To 20ms to 20000ms Td 30us to 200us A B C D Confirm that READY is on and input the START signal 1ms min When the START signal is input READY goes off and the image is captured When the image capture is completed the REND signal goes on D Output data D1 to D8 is output and then STROB is output 1 ms max later m nn ll 16 26 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 4 Inspection Execution and Result Output Procedures E When you have confirmed that STROB on switch ACK on At this point if ACK does not go from off to on within the timeout period To handle this as a timeout and abort communication After confirming that ACK is on wait for Td and then turn STROB off After confirming that STROB is off at the external device switch ACK off After confirming that ACK is off wait for Td for the next data D1 to D8 output Repeat for the number of times required for the amount of data tos After the required number of data output cycles confirm that ACK is off wait for Td perform checker drawing and other post processing and then switch READY to on At the same ti
163. es 3 2 1 Menu screen Set environment settings such as the camera mode and shutter speed for use in inspections and also the I O settings TYPE 1 7 ENVIRONMENT Start Start Trigger Start Type Communication Display Setting Save Image Mode Initialize 1 Camera Set the camera mode and shutter speed 2 Start Set the inspection start method Once Manual Repeat or Auto Repeat 3 Start Trigger This function causes the A210 A110 itself to detect whether a target object is inside the inspection region 4 Start Type Set the number of the type that starts up when the power is turned on 5 Communication Set serial parallel or other communications 6 Display Setting Sets the screen display 7 Save Image Mode Allows you to set up how images are stored 8 Initialize This returns the Environment settings to the original factory settings Multichecker A210 A110 Environment and Type 3 2 2 Set the 3 2 Environment Settings Environment settings common for all types Camera camera mode shutter speed and whether or not to use flash illumination 7 ENVIRONMENT 1 EEE 11 12 11 Camera Mode Normal Frame 12 Shutter speed 1 60 Fix 13 Flash Unused Camera Mode Normal Frame This is the standard mode for the camera Use a standard camera The shutter speed is fixed at 1 60 Use this mode when utilizing a strobe Normal Field This is the mode
164. es s No 1 Adjustment amounts Gray Edge Hor Det Rot ie irn a 1 Select Camera 2 Checker 1 3 Checker 2 Empty 61 3 380 0 89 3 5 Pos Rot Adj Group 0 6 Delete Checker Im B Image Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 4 3 5 Setting One Checker Position Adjustment Checker that uses Feature Extraction This explains how to use a Feature Extraction checker as an adjustment checker If you are unfamiliar with the operation of Feature Extraction checkers read 11 Feature Extraction Procedure 1 Select the Position Rotation Adjustment Checker number TYPE 1 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 1 BINARY EDGE DETECTION 2 GRAY EDGE DETECTION 3 FEATURE EXTRACTION 4 MATCHING 2 Select FEATURE EXTRACTION 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 13 FEATURE EXTRACTION One Ch Dos AQ 32 Theta Rot Adj 33 One Chkr Rot Adj 34 Two Chkr Rot Adj Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 3 Select One Chkr Pos Adj The setting menu for one checker position adjustment using feature extraction is displayed Use Select Camera to select the camera and Delete Checker to delete the checker as required 1 POS ROT ADJ Jud NG No 1 Feat Extr One Chkr Pos Checker Setting Slice Level No Base Pos Pos Rot Adj Group Delete Checker
165. escribed above But the data of Numeric Calculation is stored in two words in this case lower bytes are stored in the registers with smaller numbers Timing chart for when an overflow occurs If a numerical calculation overflows exceeds 32 bits or exceeds 16 bits in 16 bit mode the OVF signal is output and the data block required for the numerical calculation is output as zeros For the case that the selection is set to OFF After Read T1 LER FREE ISTART amh En f ON READY ON OFF T2 T2 D1 to D8 OFF lt Judgment Numerical calculation overflow OVF I CC lt ON l T1 START signal width 1ms min T2 Response time with respect to the START signal within 1ms 16 64 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 13 Computer Link Ke s Example Matsushita Electric Works FP series PLC Write to PLC command The basic format for the command to write to the PLC is as follows Command EE WDD000010000212345678 Ci JI JLIL Il Jl LJ Fixed unit No Ignore BCC specification Write command Data Data code Data Start register End register Response EE WDBCC S Command receive complete As the maximum number of bytes for one PLC frame is 118 when the amount of data number of words to be written exceeds 24 the format for the command is as follows y Example To write 64 words
166. esult the number of pixels up to which the result is OK Set the subtraction threshold value Set the threshold value that will be applied when performing binary processing on the gray scale difference between the template and the search object The threshold value can be set in the range 0 to 255 Set filters if necessary You can select whether to apply only an erosion filter 3 x 3 or 5 x 5 erosion or a filter that first erodes the image and dilates it or conversely a filter that dilates the image and then erodes it If you want to conceal small noise or garbage use the erosion dilation filter to erode the image and eliminate small bits of garbage and then dilate the image Eroding the image allows you to restore the details of the search object and to eliminate only the garbage Likewise you can use the dilation erosion filter to eliminate small pinholes etc Set deviation processing if necessary Set the number of the position and rotation adjustment group 12 17 Smart Matching Multichecker A210 A110 12 2 Smart Matching Checker Setup For the A110 _ Select or confirm the number of the Matching checker to be created Select Checker Setting then Template Set the coordinates of the template area gt NS Set the output point for the detected point coordinates Set the output point somewhere within the template area Press A Tmp Cnt to set the point in the centre of the area 5 S
167. esult is to have priority as necessary either vertical or horizontal 5 Base Pos Execute a test to register the base point for adjustment 6 Pos Rot Adj Group Set which checker is to be used for adjustment in the case that you are using multiple settings for position and rotation adjustment Select a group number rm Refer to 4 4 Position Adjustment Groups for details 7 Delete Checker Use this to delete a checker In the case that you have created both vertical and horizontal checkers select which one you want to delete Delete Checker Both Hor Only Ver Only eS Note If you delete a Position Adjustment Checker the inspection results for all checkers that follow the deleted checker are cleared Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 4 Next perform the checker settings Select either Vertical Checker or Horizontal Checker The setting procedure is the same for both vertical and horizontal checkers Here we will set a horizontal checker so select Horizontal Checker to display the Checker Setting menu 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 Gray Edge Pos Adj 2 Horizontal Checker el Plane Area 206 200 305 279 Edge Condition Both Edge Thres Value Scan Pitch Filter Width Average Area 21 Shape 22 Area 23 Edge Condition 24 Edge Thres Value 25 Scan Pitch 26 Filter 27 Width 28 Average Are
168. et the search area Set only the area necessary keeping in mind the effects of the search area size on processing speed 6 Set the sequence Set the search conditions for each step keeping in mind the effects of these conditions on the detected objects and search time 7 Set data output conditions if necessary Consider the scanning resolution and scanning time when setting the search conditions for each step 8 Set the number of the position adjustment group 12 18 Chapter 13 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 13 6 13 7 Inspection Results and Output Inspection Results and Output Conversion Data 2 zn nn 13 2 1 Conversion Data 2 scan 13 2 2 Conversion Data Setup Numerical Calculation 000 cee eee en 13 3 1 About Numerical Calculations 13 3 2 Creating a Numerical Calculation progran a cite ns eee eed 13 3 3 Restrictions Applying to Numerical Calculations 13 3 4 Symbols Used by Numerical Calculation DPIOQIAINS ze Sense eee A Judgment Output zur corer sce el 13 4 1 About Judgment Output 13 4 2 Creating a Judgment program 13 4 3 Restrictions Applying to Judgments 13 4 4 Symbols Used by Judgment programs Spreadsheets 00 ccc cnt Data Monitor 0c cece ccc eee 13 6 1 The Data Monitor display 13 6 2 Data Monito
169. etection angle and correlation for a maximum of five points 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 Feat Extr One Chkr Pos a Base Position A Test B Pos Dsp C Esc Select the appropriate base position from the table and press ENTER to register the selected coordinates and angle as the base position When you return to the setting menu the adjustment amounts AX AY and 490 are displayed at the top right of the screen Press B to confirm the base position for the image Press C to cancel the base position rw Refer to Setting the Base Position on page 4 17 for details Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 4 3 6 Setting a Theta Rotation Adjustment Checker that uses Feature Extraction A210 only This explains how to use a Feature Extraction checker as an adjustment checker If you are unfamiliar with the operation of Feature Extraction checkers read 11 Feature Extraction Procedure 1 Select the Position Rotation Adjustment Checker number TYPE 1 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 1 BINARY EDGE DETECTION 2 GRAY EDGE DETECTION 3 FEATURE EXTRACTION 4 MATCHING 2 Select FEATURE EXTRACTION 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 13 FEATURE EXTRACTION 31 One Chkr Pos Adj 32 Theta Rot Adj 33 One Chkr Rot Adj 34 Two Chkr Rot Adj Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation
170. etting B Pe Line 32 Area 206 240 305 240 33 Dot Count H 34 Land Count H 35 Land Filter z 5 36 Gap Filter 3 37 Filter Ho Shape Select the shape of the checker area to be created Area Create or move the checker area Dot Count Select whether to count white pixels or black pixels on the line Land Count Select whether to count white lands or black lands continuous areas of the same colour dot on the line Land Filter Set the minimum number of adjacent dots on the line required for recognition as a land The minimum size of a land can be set in the range 2 to 254 Gap Filter Set the minimum number of dots that have to be between lands for the space to be recognized as a gap The gap filter value can be set in the range 1 to 254 The default value is 3 Filter Select whether to apply erosion or dilation processing Line Checkers 6 1 Point Line Checkers Dots and Lands Line checkers can use two different methods for measurements and judg ments measurement and judgment using dot counts and measurement and judgments using land counts Using dot counts Counting the number of white or black dots pixels on the line This method compares the count of dots of the specified colour with the upper and lower limits that have been set to judge whether or not the count is within the lim its oo 0900 oo Black dot count 13 Using line counts Counting the number of
171. exception of QS if no checker data exists selection is not possible Next cannot be selected if there is no other program or if a program error occurs 13 13 Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 13 3 Numerical Calculation 3 Next select the parameters to be referenced using the cursor lever Next PA EA LI BW GW BE fla FE SM CA OCA QS CV Num Ope CHECKER Next PA EA LI BW GW BE fla FE SM CA OCA QS CV Num Ope Det No 2 1 Item J Co X Program Result Ta CA01 GE02011 E caosas Il Data Bit CA01 CA04 Eli 16bit 32bit Progam Result Jud mw o S oo 07X GE0201 1DE caon Cs Data Bit CA01 CA04 AJE 16bit 32bit Program Result I Jud Bu o a E02011DGEO1011 caos Data Bit CA01 CA04 ELX 16bit 32bit 13 14 Multichecker A210 A110 Optional Memory 13 3 Numerical Calculation 4 After entry is complete press C A confirmation message asks if you wish to register the changes you have made To register the changes press Yes To discard the information input select No To cancel press C YES E i o 5 Set the upper and lower limit values Select Next on the sub window to move the cursor to the Max field Max 000000010 _ Program Result Jud GE02011DGE01011 0 OK 07EG E0201 ite see CO Data Bit CA01 CA04 Ela 16bit 32bit DET PA EA LI BW GW BE GE FE SM CA OCA QS CV Num Ope Set the maximum
172. ey to check the base position using the image Press the C key to cancel the base position rw Refer to Setting the base position on page 4 17 for details Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 4 3 9 Setting Theta Rotation Adjustment that uses Matching A210 only This explains how to use a Matching checker as an adjustment checker If you are unfamiliar with the operation of Matching checkers read 12 Smart Matching Procedure 1 Select the Position Rotation Adjustment Checker number TYPE 1 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 BINARY EDGE DETECTION 2 GRAY EDGE DETECTION 3 FEATURE EXTRACTION 4 MATCHING 2 Select MATCHING 1 POS ROT ADJ N lo 1 GS MATCHING 41 One Chkr Pos Adj 43 One Chkr Rot Adj 44 Two Chkr Rot Adj Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 3 Select Theta Rot Adj The setting menu for theta rotation adjustment using matching is displayed Use Select Camera to select the camera and Delete Checker to delete the checker as required 1 POS ROT ADJ tomes No 1 Miasas Matching Theta Rot 9 Checker Setting Pos Rot Adj Group 2 3 BasePos joa 4 5 Delete Checker 1 Select Camera Select either the camera A or camera B image for operating the Position Adjustment checker
173. f Gray Scale Edge checkers read 10 Gray Scale Edge Checkers You can set horizontal and vertical checkers and it is possible to use them for adjustment on their own or together When using vertical and horizontal checkers together you can specify which checker has priority Procedure 1 Select the Position Rotation Adjustment Checker number TYPE 1 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 1 BINARY EDGE DETECTION 2 GRAY EDGE DETECTION 3 FEATURE EXTRACTION 4 MATCHING 2 Select GRAY EDGE DETECTION 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 12 Kern Va ple a 55 eng e 21 Pos Adi 22 Hor Det Rot Adj 23 Ver Det Rot Adj Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 3 Select Pos Adj The setting menu for position adjustment using gray edge detection is displayed Use Select Camera to select the camera and Delete Checker to delete the checker as required 1 POS ROT ADJ iasan No 1 5 Gray Edge Pos Adj 9 1 __Select_Camera Horizontal Checker Vertical Checker Priority Base Pos Pos Rot Adj Group Delete Checker 1 Select Camera Select either the camera A or camera B image for operating the Position Adjustment checker 2 Horizontal Checker 3 Vertical Checker Use these to create the checker and set items such as the scan conditions 4 Priority Use this to specify which checker r
174. f the smart matching checker can be set to 16 8 4 2 or 1 pixel or to sub pixels in each processing step The smart matching checker compresses the template image and searches the search area and the degree of compression used in conducting the search is set by setting the search accuracy by setting a certain number of pixels or sub pixels The accuracy setting is the unit that compresses the template image For example an accuracy setting of 16 pixels will compress the template image in the ratio of 16 x 16 pixels to one At this setting the search will be conducted very quickly but the accuracy will be lower than at other settings Conversely if the image compression is performed in sub pixel units a highly accurate search will be performed but the image processing will take some time Thus to process the image quickly but without compromising accuracy try using different settings to adjust the image compression rate so that the Imagechecker can search the template image most effectively The search is performed in five steps In the 1st step 16 pixels the Imagechecker will search for images that are roughly similar to the sample image In the 2nd step it will process only the areas detected in the 1st step with a higher degree of accuracy than in the 1st step It can then quickly search the template image with a high degree of accuracy if the accuracy settings are increased in the 3rd and 4th steps Thus you can change
175. fine tune the settings to adjust the processing time and accuracy When the Imagechecker is performing a search in steps to search a compressed image it may go outside the search area If this occurs the correlation value results will be displayed as an undetected error will be generated without a completed search and the judgment will be NG 12 8 Multichecker A210 A110 Smart Matching 12 1 Smart Matching If the accuracy of the final output is set at the sub pixel level the output can be obtained at the sub pixel level regardless of whether the 1st or 5th step is set at sub pixels If you set the 1st step at sub pixels the search will take an extremely long time However since it is possible to shorten the search time without compromising final output accuracy by setting sub pixels in the 5th step we recommend reducing the search time by setting and adjusting the sequencing and confirming the final search accuracy Since it is possible to set the correlation values judgment lower limits independently in each search step we recommend setting them up separately to suit the step The image compression can be set from 16 pixels but if the size of the set template does not fulfill that condition there may be conditions under which the search accuracy cannot be set 24 Output Unit This setting sets the data output order for the search results in the case that more than one object was found TYPE 1
176. for an electronic shutter camera Use a standard camera The shutter speed can be set between 1 60 and 1 10000 Double Speed Random Frame This is the setting for random shutter camera mode Use the ANM831 camera Set the DIP switch 6 on the rear side of the camera to ON Shutter speeds between 1 120 to 1 20 000 are available Double Speed Random Field This is the setting for random shutter camera mode Use the ANM831 camera Set the DIP switch 6 on the rear side of the camera to OFF Shutter speeds between 1 120 to 1 20 000 are available Internal Synchronization mode Frame In this mode the camera uses internal synchronization It is compatible with composite video input NTSC Only one camera can be used camera A Internal Synchronization mode Field In this mode the camera uses internal synchronization It is compatible with composite video input NTSC Only one camera can be used camera A The shutter speed setting range is 1 60 to 1 10 000sec Shutter Speed Set the shutter speed after selecting one the following camera modes Normal field double speed random frame field internal sync mode field Environment and Type Multichecker A210 A110 3 2 Environment Settings Environment settings common for all types 13 Flash Set to Yes in the case that you wish to use flash illumination Set this when you have selected Normal Frame for tne camera mode This initial setting is Unused Yes Yes ANM830
177. g binarization threshold level and similar parameters Select SETTING HELP TOOLS from the main menu The screen shown below will appear 6 SETTING HELP TOOLS Focus Aperture Threshold Level Multi Threshold Image Profile In Out Monitor Andad ee C Esc Camera A The Setting Help Tools menu provides the following functions 1 Lighting Adjustment Checks whether the lighting is uniform Focus Helps you adjust the focus correctly watching the screen while turning the focus ring on the lens Aperture Helps you adjust the aperture correctly watching the screen while turning the aperture ring on the lens Threshold Level Helps you adjust the binarization threshold value to obtain the desired image when there is a good crisp black white contrast Multi Threshold Helps you adjust the upper and lower threshold values to obtain the desired image when black white contrast is not so good Image Profile Displays a gray scale graph for a specified line on the image In Out Monitor Checks the parallel interface by displaying input states and forcing output states Useful for checking the connections with external devices The Setting Help Tools Multichecker A210 A110 19 1 Use Setting Help Tools to Adjust Settings Before Inspecting 1 Lighting Adjustment Checks whether the lighting is uniform If the lighting is not uniform when there is no workpiece in position as shown in the figure on the left a la
178. g Multichecker A210 A110 12 1 Smart Matching Deviation processing As shown in the diagram below deviation processing is used when you only want abnormalities outside the object workpiece to be recognized as differences but not differences in the outline area of the object workpiece Template Want this to be judged OK Want these to be judged NG The Imagechecker will use the deviation data for each pixel in the results obtained during the subtraction processing and will revise the portions you do not want it to recognize as differences the outline area in the example above to the results below the threshold value By doing this the corresponding portion will appear as the final results of the binarization Deviation data is set for each pixel in the template 12 12 Multichecker A210 A110 Smart Matching 12 1 Smart Matching As shown in the diagram below with subtraction processing alone differences in the outline areas difference 128 gt threshold value 96 are recognized as black parts in the second row but if deviation data is also used the results of the outline portions become equal to the threshold value difference 128 x deviation 0 75 96 lt threshold value and are not recognized as abnormalities On the other hand abnormalities that exceed the threshold value difference 128 x deviation 1 0 128 gt threshold value are recognized as such Area where
179. g to Numerical Calculations Calculation Order If a division is used in a calculation program there is sometimes a remainder and in that case the digits after the decimal point are discarded This rounding off is done not only when all the calculations are finished but also during the calculation in accordance with the priority order for arithmetical calculations Therefore if a division is to be carried out in the course of calculation try to put this program last if at all possible Compare the results of the two examples below AY a Example 1 CA05 CA01 2 100 when CA01 3 CA01 2 3 2 1 5 Since the decimal parts of numbers are discarded 1 5 becomes 1 CA01 2 x 100 1 x 100 100 Therefore the result of this calculation is CA05 100 2 CA05 CA01 100 2 when CA01 3 CA01 x 100 3 x 100 300 CA01 x 100 2 300 2 150 Therefore the result of this calculation is CA05 150 Number of Digits in Numerical Calculations Numerical calculations can operate on numbers in the range 2147483648 to 2147483647 Constants can be specified in the range 65535 to 65535 If an overflow if the number exceeds the permissible range occurs during calculation an error output is output from the parallel port at that point If the final result of numerical calculation is outside the range 2147483648 to 2147483647 then an error output is output from the parallel port In either of these cases the result of calculation
180. garding Execution Order for Re registration Setting position Re registration Area Display No Procedure 1 Specify the template number for performing re registration and input template re registration input signal IN8 2 READY signal goes OFF and re registration is executed 3 When re registration is complete the READY signal goes on Setting position Re registration Area Display Yes Procedure 1 Specify the template number for performing re registration and input template re registration input signal IN8 READY signal goes off and the re registration area is displayed Input template re registration input signal IN8 again When re registration is complete the READY signal goes on Execution position Re registration Area Display No Procedure 1 Specify the template number for performing re registration and input template re registration input signal IN8 2 READY signal goes off and the specified smart matching checker is executed 3 Re registration is executed at the position detected in step 2 When re registration is complete the READY signal goes on Execution position Re registration Area Display Yes Procedure 1 Specify the template number for performing re registration and input template re registration input signal IN8 2 READY signal goes off and the specified smart matching checker is executed Re registration is executed at the position detected in step 2 Input template re regist
181. ge Threshold value is changed normally The set type output even if the setting O was omitted in the request The set threshold value Checker No 01 to 96 16 51 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 11 Referencing and Changing Maximum Minimum Numerical Calculation Values 16 11 Referencing and Changing Maximum Minimum Numerical Calculation Values 16 11 1 Items related to serial communication Parallel Serial Details I O terminal Command Refer to max and min F CR limits 01 to 96 R to ref F n noR J esponse to reference 22 01 to 96 Numerical calculation Change max and min N n noR limits 22 01 to 96 N C Change complete a 96 Input the input command after confirming that the READY signal has been output from the parallel port The range for for the A110 is 01 to 48 16 11 2 Referencing the maximum and minimum values i Register No two digits 01 to 96 The following is output if the maximum and minimum values for the numerical calculation are referenced normally F n n CR Maximum value Minimum value Register No two digits 01 to 96 If you specify a register that has not been set Z p Error is output 16 52 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 11 Referencing and Changing Maximum Minimum Numerical Calculation Values 16 11 3
182. gle and correlation for a maximum of five points Select Ref Point 1 and Ref Point 2 from the table and set them 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 Feat Extr One Chkr Rot 4 GOM Point 1 Ar arto A Test B Pos Dsp C Esc 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 Feat Extr One Chkr Rot a BETT m ss asa 00 oer F203 2 2503 aros 00 oss Ec HE A Test B Pos Dsp C Esc Select the appropriate Base Position from the Ref Point 1 settings table and press ENTER to register the selected coordinates and angle as the base position Switch to the Ref Point 2 settings table use the cursor lever to switch between the tables select the appropriate Base Position and press ENTER to register the selected coordinates and angle as the base position When you return the setting menu the adjustment amounts AX AY and 40 are displayed at the top right of the screen Press B to confirm the base position for the image Press C to cancel the base position rw Refer to Setting the Base Position on page 4 17 for details Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 4 3 8 Setting One Checker Position Adjustment that uses Matching This explains how to use a Matching checker as an adjustment checker If you are unfamiliar with the operation of Matching checkers read 12 Smart Matching Procedure 1 Select the Position Rotation Adjustment Checker number
183. gs common for all types 0 2 ee eee eee 3 4 3 2 1 Men lSereen uses seeeeeMas Gees 3 4 322 Camera asien 3 5 S28 la Libs ae el he tee Ah ees ee La ie 3 6 324 SIAM INGE iit wie Satie ett alt lated Bete Ot el ee Melek ae by N 3 7 325 St r Type HER er 3 12 3 2 6 Communication 2 ee ern 3 13 3 2 7 Display Seting nni sath o een 3 14 3 2 8 Save Image Mode 4 de aa 3 15 329 ANAUIZE e eee chee e E TE E diem ie woe orto ees 3 17 VOCS tte Sita Lagi a ain ee wet he Sivek eier ro 3 18 3 3 1 Menu Screen Ute ok eee eds deen Beanie eee twee 3 18 3 3 2 Creating a New Type Number 0 eee eee eee 3 20 3 3 3 Entering a Type Title 20 0 3 20 3 3 4 Setthe Capture Camera unnn nanan 3 21 3 3 5 Select the Camera Image 0 cee 3 22 3 3 6 Switching Between Types c cece eee eee 3 24 3 3 7 Copying a Type Has ana ne a ate Mate 3 24 3 3 8 Deleting a Type nat see eek 3 25 3 3 9 Selecting Initial Display Settings 222222 ees een 3 26 3 3 10 Setting the Execution Mode cece eee eee eee 3 27 3 3 11 Initializing All Type Data 22222 eee een nern 3 28 Multichecker A210 A110 Table of Contents Chapter 4 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 1 Position and Rotation Adjustment 0 6 eaaa eee ee 4 3 4 2 The Various Modes for Position Rotation Adjustment Checkers 4 5 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Che
184. he ON OFF status of the parallel output RDY ERR STR OVF and D1 to D8 Time Displays the time required for inspection This is the time for which the READY signal has been off D1 to D8 OVF overflow STR strobe ERR error RDY ready Marker Select whether or not to display the set marker For details refer to 15 2 Marker Function 1 12 Multichecker A210 A110 Screens and Basic Operations 1 4 Setting Numerical Values 1 4 Setting Numerical Values Move the cursor lever left and right to move the highlighting to the digit to be changed then move the cursor lever up and down to increase or decrease the highlighted value 804000 gt gt a KEN Other digits are automatically incremented or decremented when appropriate Example Changing 4000 to 7900 u gt gt CM A a a a gt fea EN ENTER W Changing 4000 to 202 804000 gt gt y yv v y gt a og ENTER GA m E i k Point The upper limit cannot be set to a value less than the lower limit and the lower limit cannot be set to a value higher than the upper limit In this situation using the cursor lever simply moves the highlighting to a different digit If you need to set the upper limit to a value less than the current lower limit first select the lower limit and reduce its value before reducing the upper lim
185. ice to ICH User Defined block specification start inspection command Numerical calculation formula for specific substitution is executed Block numbers are 1 to 3 R Cp 1 R Cp External device to ICH ICH to external device User Defined Reinspect command Capture end command Checker is executed without image capture Numerical calculation formula for specific substitution is not executed Capture end command not output if 533 Read End in the environment menu is set to None E CR ICH to External device Inspection end command Inspection end command notoutputif 534 Process End in the environment menu is set to None Example 1012341234C X Cp ICH to External device External device to ICH Inspection data Type switching command Changes according to menu items 531 to 536 Output sequence is judgment then numerical calculation data Type switch numbers are from 01 to 64 01 to 32 for the A110 Y CR ICH to External device Type switching end command Output when type switching ends normally M Cp External device to ICH Type data save command Saves the type data M Cp ICH to External device Save complete command Output when saving of the type data is completed normally L Cp External device to ICH Slice level maximum and minimum value reference command Checks the maximum and minimum
186. ichecker A210 A110 Feature Extraction eS Note 365 11 1 Feature Extraction The inertial axis angle cannot be obtained if the object has a regular shape like a square circle or isosceles triangle Even if an axis is reported the data will not be reliable No error message is displayed if an axis cannot be found or if the angle of the principal axis approaches 180 degrees If theta is set to Yes the pattern displayed at the detection position rotates in accordance with the angle of the principal axis It does not rotate if theta is set to No or if a value for theta could not be obtained Filter Select whether or not to apply erosion or dilation filters to the image 11 9 Feature Extraction Multichecker A210 A110 11 1 Feature Extraction 11 1 4 Select The Adjustment Group Set whether or not the checker being created will be adjusted by a position and rotation adjuster or exposure adjuster TYPE 1 36 FEATURE EXTRACTION Jud HG Ho 1 Detected 0 6 KERPEN 61 Pos Rot Adj Grou 0 62 Expo Adj Group lt 0 0 gt 61 Position and Rotation Adjustment Group Set which position or rotation adjuster the feature extractor will be adjusted by 62 Exposure Adjustment Group Set which exposure adjuster the feature extractor will be adjusted by 11 1 5 Result Display a table of information about the detected lands up to a maximum off 99 lands FERTURE EXTRACT ION Jud 30K 1 Detected 8 3Up Do
187. iding Image message is displayed In this state some functions including A Test B lmage and display of results are unavailable for selection If filter or area settings are selected while the image is suppressed the image is displayed temporarily then suppressed again after the appropriate settings have been made 2 13 Inspection Procedure Multichecker A210 A110 2 5 Checker Pattern Display 2 5 _Checker Pattern Display The pattern for the selected checker is displayed more brightly than the patterns for other checkers esa Note On the main menu none of the checkers are displayed brightly unless Make Bright at NG is set to YES If Make Bright at NG is set to YES only the checker detecting the reject is displayed brightly No other checkers have a bright pattern display Drawing checker patterns Exposure adjusters line checkers binary window checkers and gray scale window checker Checker patterns are displayed A I Example Binary window checker pattern display Binary edge checker display The checker pattern is displayed along with a straight line joining two triangles to mark the position where an edge was detected The straight line and triangles are not displayed if no edge is found AY r J Example Binary edge checker pattern display Edge detected here 2 14 Multichecker A210 A110 Inspection Procedure 2 5 Checker Pattern Display Gray scale edge checker display The checke
188. ignal for the parallel or serial signal ER is displayed if an error occurs during calculation or if the value of a checker that has not be set is specified AY d Example CA01 GE01011 CA02 CA01 GE02011 If numerical calculations are set as shown above then as can be seen from the timing chart below the CA02 calculation is not executed when there is no ACK signal input from the parallel input When the specific substitution flag is off the calculation is not executed and the previous value is retained OFF READY output READY START input START ON ACK Specific substitution Execute Execute Whether or not the specific substitution calculation is executed is determined by whether or not the ACK signal remains ON from before the START signal is received until the READY signal goes OFF Setup is possible when setting numerical calculation programs regardless of whether the ACK signal is ON or OFF Specific substitution can also be executed from the serial interface with the P command Note Even when the specific substitution is executed it is not written to the F ROM 13 10 Multichecker A210 A110 Optional Memory 13 3 Numerical Calculation Screen Hold Condition Setting Function You can use this function to hold screens corresponding to the results of three numerical calculation results When you have specified a limit condition the screen is held if the calculation result is
189. image capture specified STA RCR Specific substitution formula not executed IN1 to IN2 block specified STA S CR 01 to 3 Start User Defined specified block inspection Specific substitution formula executed IN1 to IN2 block specified IN6 STA START signal hold ACK until RDY OFF P CR 01 to 3 Block specification Re inspect image capture not executed IN1 to IN2 block specified IN6 reinspect speci fied STA R CR 01 to 3 Image capture complete Output Image capture only complete REN REND RCR Output Inspection complete before data output ECR Output inspection data Output Judgment output D1 to D8 For D9 and after handshaking using the ACK signal and the STROBE sig nal is required Input the input command after confirming that the READY signal has been output from the parallel port Numerical data D1 to D8 Handshaking using the ACK signal and the STROBE sig nal is required Ex 002148030912C or 21 4803 912CR etc Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 4 Inspection Execution and Result Output Procedures 16 4 2 Inspection Using Serial Communications Procedure 1 Perform the communications settings 7 ENVIRONMENT 5 OZAL LAL LEOL 51 Com Modg Normal Mode 52 RS232C 53 Serial Output 54 Par
190. image start trigger process When the A button on the keypad is pressed When the serial communication command S is input When the parallel start signal is input However since the judgement of whether a keypad or parallel signal input has been made occurs in the tiny amount of time between image captures stopping may not occur with the input of that moment When the process is stopped only serial command E is output The R command is not output Also the ON OFF status of the parallel signal is kept as it was after the previous execution Execution time is expressed as ms Image Capture Start trigger is processing X Draw checker Position and rotation adjuster Fixed display of imaging Position No 1 execution and rotation adjuster No 1 Stop process X Time display NO YES Displayed as ms Judgment results from Position and rotation adjuster No 1 OK Start R output and inspection time measurement Stop processing REND signal ON i e n ana paralel ouput an um o Oo Wren ORE Afer Read status before execution Execute all of the checkers that have been set Multichecker A210 A110 Environment and Type 3 2 Environment Settings Environment settings common for all types Start trigger action during repeated starting If set so that the start trigger executes when the start method is manual automatic repeat the start trigger action works as show
191. in Ready OFF Time Key Emulate LOAD IMAGE DATA SAVE IMAGE DATA LOCK IMAGE DATA RESET IMAGE DATA 41 Display message 51 Com Mode lt When Normal Mode is selected gt 51 Com Mode lt When Computer Link is selected gt P3 13 P gt P16 54 Display Brightness Outside Region Value A210 only Language A110 62 Language 521 522 523 524 525 531 532 533 534 535 536 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 541 542 543 544 Baudrate bps Length Stop Bit Parity Flow Control Output Inval Digit Read End Process End Numerical Calc Judgment Type No Register Top Data Register Timeout Output Numerical Calc Judgment PLC Type Handshake Reset Cond Setting Template Disp Img change A210 only 21 6 Multichecker A210 A110 Menu Layout 8 HIDE SETTING gt P15 11 9 SAVE DATA gt P14 3 10SETTING HELP TOOLS gt P19 3 E 1 2 3 EXECUTION INITIALIZATION CHANGE PASSWORD NOUPO ODPD Lighting Adjustment P P19 4 Focus P19 5 Aperture P P19 6 Threshold Level gt P19 7 Multi Threshold gt P19 8 Image Profile gt P19 9 In Out Monitor P19 9 21 1 Menu Layout 21 7 Menu Layout Multichecker A210 A110 21 1 Menu Layout 21 8 Multichecker A210 A110 Manual revision history Manual No Issue date Description of changes Zu Jun 2001 First edition Jul 2001 Revised ARCT1F325E Oct 2001 Printed and bound editio
192. in bits per second There are eight possible settings 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 Length set to the same as the PLC Data length setting Set the number of bits used to represent one character of data Select either 7 bits or 8 bits Stop Bit set to the same as the PLC Stop bits setting Set the number of bits for the signal that identifies the end of the data Select either 1 bit or 2 bits Parity set to the same as the PLC Parity check setting Set type of parity check for the appended parity bit that is used to check that transmission was correct Select either None Even or Odd Flow Control Set the handshake flow control method Select either None or Xon Xoff Serial Output 531 532 533 534 Type No Register Specify a data register number in the range O to 9999 for performing the PLC product switch request Top Data Register Specify a start data register number in the range O to 9999 for when data is output to the PLC Timeout Set the timeout for the response after output of data to the PLC and the response to a type switch number request Output Specify the number of bits for the output data Select either 16 or 32 bits for the number of bits 16 bits values in the range 215 to 215 1 32768 to 32767 can be output 32 bits values in the range 231 to 231 1 2147483648 to 2147483647 can be output 16 61 Communications Seria
193. in each step The accuracy must be set to increase with each level in order from 1st to 5th Once you set the 1st search accuracy make the value small the 2nd 3rd and 4th will automatically be set so if you set the 1st at 16 pixels the rest will be set at 8 pixels 4 pixels and sub pixels Once you set a step at an accuracy of 1 pixel or sub pixels additional steps cannot be set For example if you set the 3rd step at 1 pixel or sub pixels you cannot set the 4th and 5th steps Judgment conditions Judgment Number Cnt Set the upper limit of the number of detected objects The checker will detect a number of objects similar to the template within the number set here However the number of detected objects cannot be setto exceed the previous step The maximum number of detected objects is 64 Correlation value Cor The correlation value reflects the degree of similarity between the template and the search object Ifthe correlation value is large only objects with a high degree of similarity will be detected If it is small even objects with a low degree of similarity will be detected The checker will search for objects with a degree of similarity greater than the correlation value set here The setting range for the correlation value is 0 01 to 1 00 The default value is 0 60 Smart Matching Multichecker A210 A110 12 1 Smart Matching Detection results Result Number Cnt Shows the results of the sear
194. inary Edge Pos Adj 1 Select Camera 2 Horizontal Checker 3 Vertical Checker 4 Priority 5 eee tele 6 Pos Rot Adj Group 7 Delete Checker A Test B Image Press the A Test key to display the current detection coordinates and angle 1 POS ROT ADJ Jud NG No 1 Binary Edge Pos Adj 1 Select Camera 2 Horizontal Checker 3 Vertical Checker 4 Priority PEE POE or EER EEE Detection coordinates 7 Delete Checker and angle A Test B Image eS Note Press the B Image key to check the base position using the image Press the ENTER key to register the displayed coordinates and angle as the base position The adjustment amounts AX AY and AB are displayed at the top right of the screen 1 POS ROT ADJ Jud NG nX 0 No 1 nY 0 m Adjustment amounts Binary Edge Pos Adj n6 0 0 1 Select Camera A 2 Horizontal Checker 3 Vertical Checker 4 Priority 61 3 38 0 89 3 0 5 _Base Pos 6 Pos Rot Adj Group 7 Delete Checker B Image Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 4 3 2 Setting a Horizontal Vertical Detection Rotation Adjustment Checker that uses Binary Edge Detection A210 only This explains how to use a Binary Edge checker as an adjustment checker If you are unfamiliar with the operation of Binary Edge checkers read chapter 9 Binary Edge Checkers The setting method for
195. individual land meeting the area limits for detection Without labeling Projected widths are not measured f Theta for objects Measures the inertial axis angle for detected objects With labeling Inertial axis angle is measured for each individual land meeting the area limits for detection Without labeling Measures theta when the total area of the target colour meets the area limits for detection ea Notes If the number of lands extracted exceeds 128 the Number of lands exceeds 128 error message is displayed If this happens adjust the upper and lower area detection limits to make them more restrictive so that the number of lands extracted does not exceed 128 If the number of lands extracted is below 128 but the number of lands detected when executing the checker exceeds 512 the Labeling buffer overflow Make the area smaller message is displayed If this occurs make the feature extractor area smaller 11 13 Feature Extraction Multichecker A210 A110 11 3 Feature Extraction Setup 11 3 Feature Extraction Setup Procedure 1 Set number of the feature extractor to be created 2 Select Slice Level No from the menu and select or confirm the slice level group A B C D E or F to be used by the feature extractor 3 Select Checker Setting then Shape 4 Select Shape from the menu and select either rectangle circle or polygon 5 Select Area from the menu and set the coordinates for the
196. ing and Storing Image Data 7 Press C to return to the previous image Method for loading image data Use the cursor lever to move the cursor to select the image you want to load and press ENTER The selected image will be loaded and you will return to the previous screen 15 1 2 Store Image Data Store the currently displayed image If you select SAVE IMAGE DATA the following If you select Yes the image being displayed is stored If you select No the image is not stored re Note After the current image is stored without capturing the image it is not possible to store the same image again The following message will be displayed if you try to do this E0172 It is already saved You can select from among four methods Manual Continuity Trap Limit condition for storing images Set the method in the Environment menu 15 1 3 Lock Image Data Lock and unlock stored images When using the Lock Image Data function as when using the Load Image Data function 30 reduced size screens 8 for the A110 are displayed Move the cursor to set or remove a lock on a desired image Select the image and then press A to set or remove a lock The ENTER button does not work in the Lock Image Data screen Useful Functions Multichecker A210 A110 15 1 Loading and Storing Image Data 15 1 4 Reset Image Data Delete a stored image This saved images that do not have a lock flag set on them When you select RESET IMAGE DATA the
197. ing is possible for the following screens when the READY signal is on Main screen Screen displayed when the power is switched on including when the Simple Spreadsheet is displayed Numerical calculation Judgment output Simple Spreadsheet 16 8 1 Serial Parallel Settings Parallel Serial Details I O terminal Command Easy mode switching between A and B Detailed mode IN1 to IN2 Camera switching between A Image specification 1 CR switching and B and Thru and IN7 0 to 3 Mem switching timing Confirm by RDY Switching complete READY signal off to 16 46 lCR on transition 16 44 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 8 Switching the Display Camera A210 only 16 8 2 Communication Settings Select Communication 544 Parallel Output 7 ENVIRONMENT 154 TEC melee 541 Handshake Disp Img Change No 542 Reset Cond Easy Mode 543 Setting Tem Details Mode EZZ3Disp Img Change Details Mode Select the camera switching method If you will not specify an image and will switch between camera A and camera B select Easy If you will specify an image and a camera select Detailed Select No if you will perform template reregistration with Smart Matching checker No 64 and after on the A210 In this case it is not possible to switch the camera using parallel 16 8 3 Using Serial Input to Switch the Display
198. inspection area w See 2 11 Checker Area and Marker Area Setting Method for details of how to set the area re Note Circular elliptical areas must be set so that the X coordinate difference between start point and end point is an odd number of pixels 6 Set the mask area to rectangle circle or polygon from Mask Shape 7 Select Mask Area from the menu and set the coordinates for the mask area w See 2 12 Setting Masking for details of how to set the mask area 8 Select Object from the menu and set the colour to be extracted to white or black 9 Select Object Area from the menu and set the upper and lower limits of areas to be extracted Results are only displayed for objects with areas between these limits 10 Select Condition Display the menu for processing conditions 11 Set Labeling Boundary Perim Proj Theta Filter When settings are complete press C to return to the previous screen 12 Select Detected Judgment from the menu and referring to the area values displayed at the top of the screen set the upper and lower limits to be used for OK NG judgment TYPE 1 36 FEATURE EXTRACTION Jud 0K Ho i Detected 6 1 Select Canera 2 Slice Level Ho 3 Checker Set Eetectod 3 gt Ps ed Judgment ee FE eani Licune Delete am 13 When required set position and rotation adjustment and exposure adjustment group numbers 11 14 Chapter 12 Smart Matching 12 1 Smart Matching u
199. ion Accumulated data count values Spreadsheets values Saving data using serial communication You can use the serial command MS to initiate a data save from an external device w Refer to 16 6 Saving Type Data for details 14 4 Chapter 15 Useful Functions 15 1 Loading and Storing Image Data 15 3 15 1 1 Load Image Data 15 4 15 1 2 Store Image Data 15 5 15 1 3 Lock Image Data os fava cn iz bates ce Sunn 15 5 15 1 4 Reset Image Data 15 6 15 1 5 Conditions for deleting image data 15 6 15 1 6 Hints for restoring images using VBT Ver 2 Vision Backup Tool Ver 2 15 7 15 2 Marker Function 22224 ces nee cee eed ve bane 15 8 15 93 Hide SOUING 2 sore hrtich et eanticns roga nai oa RA e 15 11 15 3 1 Hide Setting zusagen es a 15 11 15 3 2 Entering Hide Settings Mode 15 12 15 3 3 Initializing Hide Setting Information 15 14 15 3 4 Changing Password 15 15 15 4 Executing a Group Move 0 000s 15 16 Useful Functions Multichecker A210 A110 15 2 Multichecker A210 A110 Useful Functions 15 1 Loading and Storing Image Data 15 1 Loading and Storing Image Data Image data from an image captured by a camera can be stored in memory Up to 30 screens can be stored for the A210 8 forthe A110 However image data is only stored while the power is on
200. ion resistance or pressure resistance tests between metal areas of the power supply input output signal and connectors and the camera case To USA Customer Products sold by Seller are covered by the warranty and patent indemnification provisions in its Terms and Conditions of Sale only How to use this manual Two similar functions on the A110 and A210 have different names and in this manual the A 200 naming convention is employed These functions are given in the table below POS ADJ Position Adjustment POS ROT ADu Position and Rotation Adjustment Matching Smart Matching Also the A210 menu displays are used in this manual Table of Contents Chapter 1 Screens and Basic Operations 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 Main Screen ersero ananta a ehe eher 1 3 K ypad ee ee ee 1 5 1 2 1 Keypad Een a ee Ae eres 1 5 1 2 2 Operating the Cursor lever ENTER button 1 6 Main Screen Operations 00 cece tees 1 7 1 3 1 Menu Selection riss xs elon waa a 1 7 1 3 2 Switching the Image Displayed on the Monitor 1 8 1 3 3 Changing Display Items 22 222 essen een 1 10 Setting Numerical Values 0 000 c cece eens 1 13 Chapter 2 Inspection Procedure 2 1 Sequence for Checker Setup 0c cece eee eee eee eee 2 3 2 2 Inspection Execution Procedures 0 cee 2 4 2 2 1 Execution Process Order 2 cc eee eee een nenn 2 5 222 Execution M
201. ious value 0 Number of scans Spreadsheet 01 to 40 OK count NG count OK average NG average OK dispersion NG dispersion OK maximum value INI OD oO A WO Mm oO NG maximum value OK minimum value fo NG minimum value _ OK range N NG range Conversion Data Notes 2 The result is multiplied by a factor of 10 4 The number of detections can only be referenced when the Object No is specified as No 1 5 The result is multiplied by a factor of 100 Factor Standard distance Standard number of pixels 13 22 Multichecker A210 A110 Optional Memory 13 4 Judgment Output 13 4 Judgment Output 13 4 1 About Judgment Output The results of judgments performed on checkers and numerical calculation programs can be communicated to other devices The conditions for output are described here The image cannot be changed once you enter the Judgment menu so if you wish to be able to see a particular image during Judgment setup change to the required image before entering the Judgment menu 1 3 2 TYPE 1 9 JUDGMENT A Start B Copy C Esc Time 0 0ms 1 Output register No Specify which output register the results of judgment are output from There are two different types of judgment output registers internal judgment registers R and registers for external output D
202. is 0 If the results of calculation are output through the serial interface they are output as the error output e Division by Zero If the denominator in a division is 0 or if it references a value of 0 then the output of calculation is O but an error output is output from the parallel port at the same time If the results of calculation are output through the serial interface they are output as the error output e Order of Use of CA Registers numerical calculation registers If the result of a calculation in a CA register is to be used by another CA register the register being used needs to be set earlier than the register using it Calculations on CA registers are carried out in ascending order of register number 13 19 Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 13 3 Numerical Calculation A tf Example Correct CA01 GW01 GWO2 CA02 CA01 2 Incorrect CA01 CA02 2 CA02 GW01 GW02 Calculation of Negative Values If a negative constant is used in a program it must be enclosed in brackets a Example Correct 1 235 Incorrect 1 235 Number of Terms in a program A single program can have up to 55 characters and up to a maximum of 16 terms Units Used for Input and Output The units used for input and output of values and operators is shown in the table below Input value Output value sin x 100 x 10000 amp cos x 100 x 10000
203. it Y cw 1 13 Screens and Basic Operations Multichecker A210 A110 1 4 Setting Numerical Values 1 14 Chapter 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 Inspection Procedure Sequence for Checker Setup 22 220 2 3 Inspection Execution Procedures 2 4 2 2 1 Execution Process Order 2 5 2 2 2 Execution Modes e eee eee 2 6 Displayed Image and Test Functions 2 12 Hiding Images and Menus 00 00 2 13 Checker Pattern Display 240 4 2 14 Slice Levels Binarization Levels 2 16 Specifying Position and Rotation Adjustment Group 2 20 Specifying the Exposure Adjustment Group 2 22 Selecting Camera 1 00 ccc ccc tenes 2 23 Area Setup and Out of Area Range Setting 2 24 mw next page Inspection Procedure Multichecker A210 A110 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 2 16 2 17 Checker Area and Marker Area Setting Method 2 27 2 11 1 Rectangle circle oval 2 27 ZA PES N en as ee dod NS 2 27 DIT DHN DINO er Us ol ake athe ange 2 28 2 11 4 Polygonalline 4 2 2222 2 eee re 2 28 2 11 93 POVOON 22 ea 2 29 Setting MASKING 2 224 k2 use a 2 30 Filler Selup 22 si et 2 31 Changing Shapes re eltern ehe 2 32 Entering Upper and Lower Limit Values 2 33 Copying a Checker
204. ith this setting if there are no numerical calculations set the data will be output once as zeros regardless of the data width For judgment output handshaking is performed until the data has been output from the last specified external output register JD For numerical calculations CA registers that have not been set and CA registers that perform output control are skipped not output You can set the output data length for numerical calculations for each of 24 groups CA01 to CA04 CA05 to CA08 CA09 to CA12 CA93 to CA96 The numerical range that can be handled by each of these data lengths is as follows if a number outside of the range is output the overflow flag goes on 8 bits 0 to 255 16 bits 0 to 65535 32 bits 2147483648 to 2147483647 16 28 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 4 Inspection Execution and Result Output Procedures Data Switching Timing Select from among one of the following three selections from item 542 Reset Cond 1 Hold latch 2 Off after image capture 3 Off before image capture Latch With this setting the data is continuously output The data is switched at the point when and inspection finishes accordingly if the previous inspection result is on and the current inspection result is also on the data stays on continuously and is not switched off OFF START a u Me a WR yes ON OFF rn a GE oa ee READY ON O
205. ively unaffected by noise enabling reliable edge detection Projection scanning Projection scanning is a method for images where the gray scale image is grainy and individual edges do not stand out well Reliable edge detection can be achieved by averaging the brightness in the vertical direction and using the integrated image data produced as the basis for edge detection in the scanning direction Images that have undergone projection scanning can be confirmed from Result Average brightness in vertical direction thy IM Gray Scale Edge Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 10 1 Gray Scale Edge Checkers 24 25 Area Create or move the checker area The area cannot be set to a size of less than 7 pixels in the scanning direction The Illegal checker area size error will appear Edge Condition Set the edge conditions for the checker being created A gray scale edge checker scans from start point to end point detecting edges in the image under inspection where light changes to dark or where dark changes to light or both The edges are detected at locations meeting the conditions set for the edge threshold value The default setting is Both When set to Both the filter width and average area functions work on both light to dark edges and dark to light edges enabling edges with positive and negative differentials to be detected i i N
206. ker A210 A110 4 1 Position and Rotation Adjustment lt a Note In order to make the appropriate adjustments the Multichecker uses checker functions to provide position and rotation adjustment Consequently you need to be aware of the functions of inspection checkers in order to set adjusters First users of the Image Checker should read chapters 9 Binary Edge Checkers 10 Gray Scale Edge Checkers 11 Feature Extraction Checkers and 12 Smart Matching in order to gain an understanding of the basics of the various inspection checkers Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 2 The Various Modes for Position Rotation Adjustment Checkers 4 2 The Various Modes for Position Rotation Adjustment Checkers Binary edge checker Position adjustment Binary edge checkers are used as the base checkers calculating adjustments AX and AY from the results of vertical and horizontal scanning checkers Shapes available are lines and planes with a mixture of the two being possible There is no need to set both the horizontal and vertical base checkers if not required If only one is set the adjustment in that direction will be calculated If both checkers are set the order of priority can be specified The reference point is the intersection between vertical and horizontal lines passing through the coordinate obtained by the horizontal checker and the coordinate obtained by the vertical checker With a binary edge
207. ker decision It is not the time between OFF and ON of the ready signal 3 10 Multichecker A210 A110 Environment and Type 3 2 Environment Settings Environment settings common for all types Output of the R image capture completion serial command For the start trigger the R command will not be output even if it is set to output in the Communication settings under the Environment menu Output of the REND signal The REND signal is always OFF Re execution serial command R When re execution is done using the R command the trigger checker is executed without any conditions and other checker executions are controlled based on the result Since repeated executions will not occur the trigger checker s inherent control actions OK waiting and NG waiting will not occur 3 11 Environment and Type Multichecker A210 A110 3 2 Environment Settings Environment settings common for all types 3 2 5 Start Type Set the number of the type that starts up when the power is turned on Ifyou set No 1 No 1 will always start up when the power is turned on If you set Last store type No the type currently being inspected or the type being set up will start up the next time the controller starts up When you want to start up another type on the next startup select the type number you want to start up and select this item re Note It is also possible to execute a data save using a serial command from an external
208. ker rotation adjustment A210 only The amount of adjustment AX AY AB can be calculated from the results of using a single matching checker as the base checker The reference point is the detection position sought using matching and any two points can be selected from a maximum of 5 detection results The reference point becomes the midpoint between those two points The rotation angle is the angle at the intersection of the line created by the two points selected during reference setup when the AX and AY adjustment values were generated for the amount the reference point must be moved and the line created by the two points detected when the command was executed Reference point AB 4 14 Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 2 The Various Modes for Position Rotation Adjustment Checkers Matching checker Two checker rotation adjustment A210 only The amount of adjustment AX AY A9 can be calculated from the results of using two matching checkers as the base checkers Set each point from the detection results one point at a time as you wish and their midpoint will be the reference point The rotation angle is the angle at the intersection of the line created by the two points selected during reference setup when the AX and AY adjustment values were generated for the amount the reference point must be moved and the line created by the two points detected when the command was executed
209. l checker giving a detection error 4 16 Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 2 The Various Modes for Position Rotation Adjustment Checkers Setting the base position A position and rotation adjuster is a checker that obtains the amount of adjustment between the coordinates reference point set atthe time the checker is set up with the coordinates at the time the checker is executed A test must be conducted to set the reference point If the setting is for a camera image a new image is captured when the test is conducted The following confirmation message is displayed if you attempt to terminate the setting procedure without conducting a test and setting a base position No base position has been set Cancel YES QE If you select Yes the settings and changed data will be lost Unless you want to abandon the setup procedure and lose the settings select No and set the reference position The base position is automatically cleared whenever changes are made to shape area or priority setting When any of these items have been changed set the base position and the position and rotation adjuster again If only a horizontal base checker has been set the display shows only the value for the X coordinate and if only a vertical base checker has been set the display shows only the value for the Y coordinate With the A210 for position and rotation adjustment the angle is fixed and displayed as
210. l and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 13 Computer Link 535 Numerical Calculation Set whether or not to output the numerical calculation result 536 Judgment Set whether or not to output the judgment result 542 Reset Cond Set so that the parallel output is either latched the output is held until the next parallel output or goes off the parallel output goes off when image capture completes PLC communication settings Operation Computer link Data length Setto same as the ICH Bit length Parity check Setto same as the ICH Parity Stop bits Setto same as the ICH Stop bits Stop code Cp Start code No STX Communication speed setting Set to same as the ICH Transmission speed FP2 COM port communication example Description of result output from the Imagechecker lt Numerical calculation results gt lt Judgment output gt CA01 1234 JDO1 ON CA02 12 JDO2 Not set CA03 Not set JDO3 OFF CA04 56 JDO4 OFF CA05 and on Not set JD05 and on Not set Communication conditions Transmission speed 9600 Bit length 8 Stop bits 2 Parity Odd 16 62 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel Communication settings lt ImageChecker communication settings gt 7 Environment 51 Communication mode 52 RS232C 521 522 523 524 Baudrate bps Length Stop Bit Parity 53 Serial Output 532 Top Data Register 534 Output 535 536
211. layed on the screen when you have finished switching to a different type If you selected No the above message is not displayed The message is also not displayed if you set No 1 as the start type number When you switch types the execution results are cleared for all of the checkers In addition if you select a type number that has not been set up the type cannot be switched Select a type number that has been set up and switch the type 3 3 7 Copying a Type Procedure 1 Set a copy destination for the type number When changing the capture camera the stored image data including those that are locked are all deleted Select and confirm Copy Type Set the type number copy source Enter YES to copy when Execute is displayed Enter NO to go back without copying Multichecker A210 A110 Environment and Type Notes 3 3 Types Even if you are copying a type that has already been set the source type data overwrites the current data so make sure that the data for the currently selected type is no longer required If memory capacity is insufficient or too many checkers are set an error message is displayed and the type is not copied When the type was copied the image data stored with the copy destination type including those that are locked are all deleted When the type was copied spreadsheets data for the number of scans with the copy destination type data for the number of errors and OK and
212. lete vesi INO Useful Functions Multichecker A210 A110 15 2 Marker Function Moving and resizing a marker Procedure 1 Select the marker to edit Use the cursor lever to select the marker graphic The currently selected marker graphic is highlighted displayed more brightly than the rest 8 MARKER Press ENTER to display the setting window and select Area Area The start point of the selected marker will be displayed Move or resize the marker in the same way as you would when creating a new marker 15 10 Multichecker A210 A110 Useful Functions 15 3 Hide Setting 15 3 Hide Setting 15 3 1 Hide Setting It is possible to hide and unhide individual operating menu items and setting items This feature can be used when you don t want to change the setting contents or when you want to hide unnecessary menu items The settings are protected by password The factory set original password is 0000 8 HIDE SETTING 1 EXECUT IO 2 INITIALIZATION 3 CHANGE PASSHORD 1 Execution Apply the hide setting to items selected after the password has been input Items to which the setting is applied will no longer be displayed 2 Initialization Restore the default setting on all items to which the hide setting had been applied The default setting is to show all items 3 Change Password Change the set password Input password When the hide setting is applied the following pas
213. lo Lo olo s lolo s aJolofo o 3 4 4 4 9 13 13 13 13 0 o FATERS gt Number of 0 FILTER 2 o RTE Number of edges edges Number of edges Number of edges In the above example with FILTER 2 and WIDTH 7 the 6th column is detected 10 8 Multichecker A210 A110 Gray Scale Edge Checkers 10 1 Gray Scale Edge Checkers 274 Average Area can only be set for individual scans Set the range for averaging starting from the edge position that fulfills the filter width conditions Direction of the scan 01 105 110 x x x Average 0 Average 1 Average 2 Average 3 The position where WIDTH 6 is satisfied Gray Scale Edge Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 10 1 Gray Scale Edge Checkers 28 Detect Position Set the edge detection point of the checker to be created B D 0 gt Scanning direction i 55 45 75 B D F ne Dark 60 50 80 Figures shown A C E differential values Method Display output coordinates Differential value Edge count 60 Differential value at Point A output point A 60 Differential value at point A Points A and F 75 output Differential value at point F 80 Differential value at Point E output point E k F Differential values for Points A B C
214. low the deleted checker are cleared Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 4 Next perform the checker settings Select either Vertical Checker or Horizontal Checker The setting procedure is the same for both vertical and horizontal checkers Here we will set a horizontal checker so select Horizontal Checker to display the Checker Setting menu 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 Binary Edge Pos Adj 2 Horizontal Checker Plane Area 206 200 305 279 Edge Condition Both Filter 3 Width 5 21 Shape 22 Area 23 Edge Condition 24 Filter 25 Width Set each of the items w For details regarding the settings refer to 9 Binary Edge Checkers This same menu is displayed when you select Vertical Checker 5 Set and confirm the Slice Level No Set and confirm the Slice Level No for the base checker Slice Level No 6 Set the priority Specify whether the vertical or horizontal checker results are to have priority When you select Priority the following menu is displayed Make the appropriate selection w Refer to Priority on page 4 16 for details No Hor Ver Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker T Set the base position rw Refer to Setting the Base Position on page 4 17 for details 1 POS ROT ADJ Jud NG No 1 B
215. lt Off after image capture Reset OFF after completion of the next inspection image capture Off before image capture Reset OFF before starting the next inspection image capture after detecting the start signal For a detailed timing chart refer to Data Switching Timing page 16 29 Setting Template Set whether or not to re register the Smart Matching template using parallel input and select one of the following four execution methods No Do not re register even if the re register signal is input Setting position Execute re registration at the position that the template area was set Execution position Execute the matching checker and re register at the detected position or the position with the highest correlation in the case that multiple objects are detected Adjustment position Execute the Position Adjustment checker and perform re registration at the position where the template area was first set within the corrected search area wm Refer to 16 7 Template Smart Matching Re registration for details 16 15 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 2 Communication Settings 544 Disp Img Change This switches the camera image displayed on the monitor using parallel input There are three switching methods No Select No in the case that you will perform template reregistration with Smart Matching checker No 64 and after on the A210 In this case it is not possible t
216. mage C Chg Disp nal Time 83 8ms 1 Model information Shows the name and version number for the controller software you are using 2 Version Version of the software being used 3 Type and title Shows the currently displayed or selected type number 4 Menu items Displays the menu and setting items The current selection is highlighted TYPE Allows you to switch or copies the type SLICE LEVEL Allows you to set the binary level CHECKER Allows you to set up various check functions as well as Judgment Output and Numerical Calculation DATA MONITOR Use to set the data displayed for data monitoring SPREADSHEETS Shows the inspection calculation results in a table CONVERSION DATA This function is used to replace the number of measured pixels with the actual dimensions 7 ENVIRONMENT Allows you to select the start method input and output and camera Screens and Basic Operations Multichecker A210 A110 1 1 Main Screen HIDE SETTING Allows you to customize the menu display SAVE DATA Allows you to save the setup data SETTING HELP TOOLS Functions to adjust camera and lighting settings Keypad key functions Displays the keys and functions that can be used with the current menu Keypad B key C key Image icon Displays the type of the currently displayed Image Press the B key to switch images mw Refer to 1 2 1 Keypad and 1 3 2 Switching the Image Displayed on the Moni
217. me REND will change to off Data Bit Assignment In the case of 8 bit data Judgment output bit assignment in the case that one or more of JD09 to JD16 has been specified Firsttime De or os os oa os be o JDO8 JD07 JDO6 JD05 JD04 JD03 JDO2 JD01 Second time os D7 be os oa os D2 o1 JD16 JD15 JD14 JD13 JD12 JD11 JD10 JD09 Bit assignment Numerical calculation bit assignment In the case of 8 bit output data bs oz os Ds D4 os D2 D1 1 0 In the case of 16 bit output data Cycle 2n0 Da D7 De Ds 0a Ds Da OF 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Cycle 2n 1 Ds D7 De D5 D4 ps D2 D1 15 14 13 12 1 10 9 8 In the case of 32 bit output data cle 2n 0 D7 oe o5 D4 pa D2 D1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 cle 2n 1 D7 De os D4 os D2 D1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 cle 2n 2 D7 be 05 oa pa D2 D1 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 cle 2n 3 D7 pe 05 p4 pa p2 n1 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 C lt C lt C lt C lt 16 27 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 4 Inspection Execution and Result Output Procedures IE Notes To output judgment results set Environment Parallel Output Judgment to Out even with this setting zeros are output once When outputting numerical calculation results set Environment Parallel Output Numerical Calc to Out even w
218. me with respect to the START signal within 1ms 16 59 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 13 Computer Link 2 Type switching PLC Imagechecker Outputs the Type READY ON Ready ON signal parallel TYPE after confirming that Ready is on Ready OFF Type No to Y switch to Request the type No to switch to Reads the product x type no from the Response specified data register Execute the type switch Y Ready ON If the specified data register number is out of range the following command is returned by the PLC In this case communication stops the Error signal is output and Ready goes on Response EE 6103 BCC If type switching is not possible the Error signal is output and Ready goes on rm om Type switch execution signal TYPE ofr N Orr ae kd a ii B ma Error signal ERROR S ON T1 TYPE signal width 1ms min T2 Response time with respect to the TYPE signal within 1ms Ready signal READY ON 16 60 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 13 Computer Link 16 13 4 Communication Settings Imagechecker communication settings 7 Environment 51 53 Com mode Computer Link 52 RS232C 521 522 523 524 525 Baud rate bps set to the same as the PLC Communication speed setting The units for the communication transmission speed are
219. ment Output eS Note If a trap has been specified for the program the trap is deleted along with the program Copying a judgment condition Procedure 1 Move the cursor to the register number where you want to create the judgment condition and select it 2 Press B to display the Copy Source Number selection window Source No JD 3 Input and confirm the number of the register where the judgment condition program that you want to copy is stored Program When you select ggg eu dr N the copy source number the judgment stored in the source register is displayed in the destination register Source No JD 3 4 If you wish to use the copied judgment condition program as is press C Return to register it If you want to modify the numerical calculation program press ENTER to display setting items and edit it using the same procedure that you would use to create a program 13 29 Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 13 4 Judgment Output Setting and Canceling NG Operation Trap function NG Display function Procedure 1 Set the register No for the judgment condition that you want to set or cancel A NG Exec is displayed at the bottom left of the screen R NG Exec 2 When nothing is displayed to the left of the Register No NG operation is not set 3 Press A to display a T to the left of the Register No Press it again to display an N to the left of the Register No ypo1 GE01
220. ment output register when The numerical calculation register and judgment output register output up to the last register number for which a formula is set excluding numerical calculation output control Numerical calculation register When a referenced checker does not exist When a formula is not registered in the referenced numerical calculation register When a 32 bit overflow occurs during calculation When a zero divide occurs during calculation Judgment output register When a referenced checker does not exist When a formula is not registered in the referenced numerical calculation register or judgment output register When a numerical calculation register or judgment output register that has generated an error is referenced eS Note If you want to check the errors for numeric calculation judgment output or each checker display a list of checkers Refer to Checker List in section 13 7 for more details Camera switching error conditions If you attempt to switch cameras using one of the following methods with a setting for Type Menu Capture Camera is something other than AB The Easy switch camera A to from camera B signal was input With the capture camera set at either A AB Vertical Division or AB Horizontal Division a switch signal specifying camera B either Thru or Mem was input With the capture camera set at B a switch signal specifying camera A either Thru or Mem
221. mula Reference Distance Input the actual dimension measured on the screen using a scale or calipers that is to be used for the reference distance Input a number of up to seven digits 1 to 9999999 Pixels Measure the reference distance and input the number of pixels Input a number of up to seven digits 1 to 9999999 Scale When you have input the reference distance and number of pixels the scale factor is calculated automatically and displayed using up to a maximum of nine digits including the decimal point The scale factor is calculated using the following formula Scale Reference Distance Pixels B Delete To delete an input select it and press the B Delete button C Exit Returns you to the previous menu 13 4 Multichecker A210 A110 Optional Memory 13 2 Conversion Data 13 2 2 Conversion Data Setup Procedure 1 First measure the reference target object a scale or calipers will be useful For this measurement use an edge detector to obtain the number of pixels between the gradations Example 1000um how many pixels Edge detection checker Scale 2 Select CONVERSION DATA from the Menu screen input the number for the conversion data CVO1 to CVO4 and press ENTER First input the distance between the scale measurement gradations as the Reference Distance 3 Next input the number of pixels between the scale measurement gradations obtained in step 1 Base Dist Base Pixel
222. n 2nd edition Additional Key Emulate function ARCT1F325E 1 Jun 2002 3rd edition ARCT1F325E 2 Jan 2003 Ath edition ARCT1F325E 3 Mar 2004 5th edition ARCT1F325E 4 Sep 2005 6th edition Correction of errors ARCT1F424E Sep 2006 First edition Revision associated with a change of the brand NAiS to Panasonic Correction of errors Multichecker A210 A110
223. n below so that inspection will not take place more than once for the same object First execution Parallel output OFF when OFF Before Read Position and rotation adjuster No 1 execution Trigger checker decision OK Start R output and inspection time measurement REND signal ON Parallel output OFF When OFF After Read Execution of all set checkers Environment and Type Multichecker A210 A110 3 2 Environment Settings Environment settings common for all types Second and following executions Parallel output OFF when OFF Before Read Position and rotation adjuster No 1 execution Trigger checker decision NG YES Image capture Position and rotation adjuster No 1 execution Trigger checker decision OK NO NO Start R output and inspection time measurement REND signal ON Parallel output OFF When OFF After Read Execution of all set checkers During repeated image loading the image start triggering process stops ifthe A button on the keypad serial command S or parallel start signal is input Serial communication during image start trigger process Only the S command for stopping the process is accepted Other commands are ignored Parallel communication during image start trigger process Only the start signal for stopping the process is accepted Other signals are ignored Execution time Execution time is measured after the trigger chec
224. n in step 1 above press ENTER again A sub window is displayed for selection of parameters to be input EN EA LI BW GW BE GE FE SM CA OCA JR JD Ope I Note This cannot be selected if no checker data exists 3 Next select the parameters to be referenced PA EA EI BW GW BE GE FE SM CA OCA JR JD Ope PA EA M BW GW BE GE FE SM CA OCA JR JD Ope CHECKER 1 Item Dot Count JD1 L1011 Checker numbers cannot be selected if the checker does not exist 13 27 Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 13 4 Judgment Output 4 After entry is complete press C A confirmation message asks if you wish to register the changes you have made To register the changes press Yes To discard the information input select No To cancel press C Register YES Gwe To Revise Judgment Conditions Procedure 1 Ifyou make an input error then after setting the judgment program register No use the cursor lever to move the highlight cursor to the incorrect item and press B to delete the item Ally L 1011 2 To add to a program characters are inserted in front of the highlight cursor To Delete Judgment Conditions Procedure 1 Select the register No of the judgment program you want to delete 2 Use the cursor lever to move the highlight cursor to the location then press B to delete the program JDO12L1011 L1021 JDo13 13 28 Multichecker A210 A110 Optional Memory 13 4 Judg
225. n the Imagechecker side are set under the communications settings on the Environment menu Set the communications environment as follows Communications mode Normal RS232C Baud rate Set to match the computer baud rate Length 8 bit Stop bit 2 bit Parity None Flow control Hard flow is automatically used regardless of setting Activation conditions The conditions under which VBT Ver 2 Vision Backup Tool Ver 2 will operate are basically shown in A Start It can only be used when type switching from an external device is possible that is under the following conditions Under main menu conditions When the checker list is displayed When spreadsheets are displayed However if you enter spreadsheets or numerical calculations judgment output from the menu A Start will start and you will not be able to enter VBT Ver 2 mode Transmission data Data that can be transmitted with VBT Ver 2 are as follows Type data by type or all together Environment data settings on the Environment menu Hide Settings information Store Image Data single screen units Operations The transfer to VBT Ver 2 mode is conducted entirely at the computer If you shift to VBT Ver 2 mode the menu disappears and the READY signal goes OFF rm See the computer s VBT Ver 2 Help for additional information Warnings You can restore desired types and images using VBT Ver 2 but if the image data is stored and there is a
226. nage CsEsc dA Tine 0 0ns gs so ec a o i 32 BINARY WINDOW o Jud HG Ho 1 Area 1 Select Canera 0 A i Slice Level Ho ean Checker Setting Area Judgnent lt 245760 Use the l Adj Group 0 cursor lever to Copy Checker select an item o glade Shares 0 A Test Bz Inage C3Esc WA Tine 0 0ns TYPE 1 32 BINARY MINDOH Jud HG Ho 1 Area 1 Select Canera A lice Level Ho A Checker Sett ine Ar Skica lev 5780 Use the cursor Adie PY ee re i lever to select an Copy C item and press Delete ENTER to confirm the selection Screens and Basic Operations Multichecker A210 A110 1 3 Main Screen Operations 1 3 2 Switching the Image Displayed on the Monitor Press B in the main menu to change the displayed image However display settings performed here are temporary and if the power is switched off or a type switch is executed the settings in 1 TYPE 5 Camera Image take effect The images that can be displayed depend on the settings in 1 TYPE 4 Capture Camera w For details regarding Gray and Binary refer to 2 6 the Slice Levels Binarization Lebels Example Camera setting A Disp Image A Camera Gray Mem Gray NG Binary Thru A Binary Mem Binary NG A A Camera image display The camera image currently being displayed is indicated by the icon displayed on the bottom left ofthe screen Gray Thru Binary Thru T u A to F Slice levels A to F L
227. nd b and executing inspection again the problems c d or and e may be occurring Save data error When data is not saved properly and writing original stored data to flash memory fails Parallel monitor within setting help When the ERR signal goes ON with the parallel monitor setting When after an error is output before entering setting help and you are taken out of setting help and returned back to the main menu Errors will occur in spreadsheets when A referenced checker does not exist A formula is not registered in the referenced numerical calculation register or judgment output register A numerical calculation register or judgment output register that has generated an error is referenced Errors will occur in the template re registration process when Smart Matching is not set a non existent checker was specified The specified checker number is set for an image from a camera other than that set for the capture camera Error Output Multichecker A210 A110 18 2 Error Signal Output Conditions The number of detected objects during re registration at the execution position is 0 Execution of position adjustment for re registration at the adjustment position resulted in part ofthe template area protruding off the screen You attempted to register an image without features The quantity exceeds the limits Errors will occur in the numerical calculation register or judg
228. ned off before the input output power source If you turn off the input output power source before the controller power source the controller unit will detect an input signal level change and may not run properly Before Switching On the Power The following points should be checked before switching the power on to the controller for the first time Check that no extra wiring left installation especially conductive materials have become attached to the board Confirm that the power supply wiring and I O wiring and power supply voltage are correct Firmly tighten all installation screws and terminal block screws Before Creating Type Data Before creating type data be sure to initialize the environment settings and all type settings w See 3 Environment and Types for more information about initialization Other Instructions Use monitor monitor cable keypad camera and camera cable models and serial numbers specified by Matsushita Do not disassemble modify or change internal settings for the Micro Imagechecker unit or other equipment Setting or changing items other than those that can be set or changed as described in the product manual and specifications will result in damage After completing all of the settings for the Micro Imagechecker do not connect the personal computer used for connecting the keypad restoring or backup in order to prevent malfunctioning due to noise Donot perform insulat
229. nt of available memory for setting the type data I Notes The following restrictions apply to the settings for type data 1 The amount of data for all checkers for all types must not exceed 1280 kbytes approximately 2 The total number of checkers set for all types must not exceed 4096 1 1 The method for counting differs according to the checker Types numerical calculations judgment outputs marker simple spreadsheets and data monitor Each is counted as one checker Position rotation adjustment reference Number of reference checkers 2 and 1 in the case that priority is specified For example the checker count is 15 in the case of position rotation adjustment of gray edge reference with priority specified Position rotation adjustment matching reference 2 x number of reference checkers 2 Smart matching every two are counted as one checker 3 19 Environment and Type Multichecker A210 A110 3 3 Types 3 3 2 Creating a New Type Number Procedure 1 Input and set the new type number that you wish to create 3 3 3 Entering a Type Title Procedure 2 Select Input Type Title 3 The character selection window shown below will be displayed Use the cursor lever to select and set characters You can input up to 16 characters for the title Bie c b E F G H Space Del__ I IsIKlLIMmINlo pP 7 8l9 EIEIEIEZEIKIKJEIEIEZKIEN KZEZEBEZEIEIETENENFIEZEN lt To delete a charact
230. ntil the next READY signal is turned ON If the external devices cannot recognize that the READY signal was turned OFF input the start signal when the READ END REND signal was turned ON Multichecker A210 A110 Environment and Type 3 2 Environment Settings Environment settings common for all types 3 2 4 Start Trigger This function causes the A210 A110 to detect whether a target object is inside the inspection region rather than detecting a signal from some external device Images are continuously captured until a target object enters the inspection region and at this point the inspection checker executes POS ROT ADJ Checker No 1 is used to detect the target object The display image when Start Trigger is executed When the Start Trigger function is executed it is not possible to display Gray NG or Binary NG images When Start Trigger is set to YES Gray NG and Binary NG are not displayed in the Chg Disp Change Display menu If there are types for which the display image is set to a NG image and you change the Start Trigger setting to YES the following message is displayed If you select YES the image display for the type with the NG image selected will be changed to either a Gray Mem or Binary Mem image There is TYPE which selected image NG Change Canera Inags HO Environment and Type Multichecker A210 A110 3 2 Environment Settings Environment settings common for all types Stopping the
231. ntly the monitor display image is only updated when another NG occurs i e the current NG image is displayed until the next NG occurs under the same register conditions The monitor only displays the NG image and inspections are executed on a new image 13 25 Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 13 4 Judgment Output Example Use of the lt NG Display gt function lt Capture image Capture image y Capture image Capture image Capture image Inspection image A A A APA Judgment result OK NG1 OK OK NG2 Displayed image A gt A gt A gt A gt A Hold Hold NG image 1 NG image 1 NG image 1 NG image 2 J Pa g It is also possible to set and change checkers when a NG image is being displayed However in the following cases the NG display image is reset The B button is pressed to switch display images The type is switched The power is switched off 13 26 Multichecker A210 A110 Optional Memory 13 4 Judgment Output 13 4 2 Creating a Judgment program In the judgment condition program example described here JDO1 goes on if the Line No 1 checker judgment result is OK Procedure 1 Align the cursor to select the register number for the calculation program you are going to create and press ENTER 9 JUDGMENT 2 From the state show
232. o switch camera images using IN7 Easy mode Changes between Camera A and Camera B when parallel input IN7 goes on Details mode Changes to the specified camera A or B for the parallel inputs IN2 and IN2 and the specified image Thru or Memory when IN7 goes on w Refer to 16 8 Switching Display Camera for details regarding the timing chart and the method for specifying IN1 and IN2 16 16 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 3 Serial Parallel Communication Command Tables 16 3 Serial Parallel Communication Command Tables 16 3 1 Serial Command Table ICH in the Data Direction column indicates the A210 A110 Image Checkers S Cp 1 External device to ICH Function Execute All Autom Switch start inspection command Numerical calculation for specific substitution not executed P Cp 1 External device to ICH Execute All Autom Switch start inspection command Numerical calculation for specific substitution executed R Cp 1 External device to ICH Execute All Autom Switch reinspect command Checkers executed without capturing a new image Numerical calculation for specific substitution not executed S Cp 1 External device to ICH User Defined block specification start inspection command Numerical calculation formula for specific substitution is not executed Block numbers are 1 to 3 P Cp 1 External dev
233. o 6 T n n amp Change complete ine en Input the input command after confirming that the READY signal has been output from the parallel port 16 9 2 Referencing the maximum and minimum values Slice Level No A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 and F 6 The following is output if the Slice Level value is referenced normally L n n amp p Maximum value 1 to 255 Minimum value 0 to 254 Slice Level No A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 and F 6 16 48 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 9 Referencing and Changing Maximum Minimum Slice Level Values 16 9 3 Changing the maximum and minimum values Maximum value 1 to 255 Minimum value 0 to 254 Slice Level No 1 to 6 The following is output if the Slice Level value is changed normally T n nop Maximum value 1 to 255 Minimum value 0 to 254 Slice Level No 1 to 6 16 49 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 10 Referencing and Changing Gray Scale Edge Threshold Values 16 10 Referencing and Changing Gray Scale Edge Threshold Values When using an inspection checker or gray scale edge checker for position adjustment it is possible to reference and modify the gray scale edge threshold values from an external device 16 10 1 Items related to serial communication Parallel Serial Details 7 5 I O terminal Command Refer to threshold K n OR value 01 to 96
234. odes ns ee er decodes tauece nae 2 6 2 3 Displayed Image and Test Functions 00 e ee eee eee 2 12 2 4 Hiding Images and Menus 0 0 cece tees 2 13 2 5 Checker Pattern Display 0 0 c cece eee eee ees 2 14 2 6 Slice Levels Binarization Levels 0 00 cece 2 16 2 7 Specifying Position and Rotation Adjustment Group 2 20 2 8 Specifying the Exposure Adjustment Group seess asarrean een 2 22 2 9 Selecting Camera ss cance exten Eset Re OSes hele Leet u 2 23 2 10 Area Setup and Out of Area Range Setting 0 0 eee 2 24 2 11 Checker Area and Marker Area Setting Method 2 27 2 11 1 Rectangle circle oval 0 cece eee 2 27 2112 Alb ee ee bass net kena ee see Aeros Baa eek 2 27 2 1123 MING Gin once aud Sens ee a eRe ERE eS eR I Er 2 28 2 114 P lygonallnes as22r ist a ae 2 28 211 9 HPOIYgoN 2 Sa raus ers 2 29 Table of Contents Multichecker A210 A110 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 2 16 2 17 Setting Masking 42 34 ee ee 2 30 Filter Setups sont Din 2 31 Changing Shapes us a echoes eS ev acide ane Sie eS Be Ewa RS 2 32 Entering Upper and Lower Limit Values 0 0 0 0 eee eee 2 33 Copying a Checker 2 ices kee ie rl ee 2 34 Deleting a Checker rn een ee een eee te EY 2 35 Chapter3 Environment and Type 3 1 3 2 3 3 Setting tem Listens bees Goad eee ee hess Sean 3 3 Environment Settings Environment settin
235. of node Move all Set node 4 ENTER A Select A ENTER Add or Delete gt Next node i oo ee sm B Delete node Multichecker A210 A110 Inspection Procedure 2 11 Checker Area and Marker Area Setting Method 2 11 5 Polygon Press ENTER to switch between Move all and Set node Press C to go in the opposite direction When moving a node pressing A twice adds an additional node and pressing A and B deletes a node Adding a node Use the cursor lever to move the added node then press ENTER to fix it Press C if you wish to cancel the addition and revert to Set node mode More nodes can be added up to a maximum of 16 Deleting a node Delete the selected node Nodes can be deleted until only the minimum three nodes remain C Cancel addition of node Move all Set node ENTER A gt Select A ENTER Add or Delete _ y Next node e 70 B c c Delete node B Inspection Procedure Multichecker A210 A110 2 12 Setting Masking 2 12 Setting Masking Mask areas can be set for binary window checkers gray scale window checkers and feature extractors A mask area is an area within an inspection or extraction area where inspection or extraction is not performed Setting a mask area is one way of adapting a checker s inspection area or an extractor s area to a complex shape Only one mask area can be set per checker Inspection area rectangle Area where inspection is perf
236. of using two feature extractors as the base checkers Only rectangle can be set as the shapes From the detection results set each point one at a time to the location you desire The mid point becomes the reference point av 4 12 Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 2 The Various Modes for Position Rotation Adjustment Checkers Matching checker One checker position adjustment The amount of adjustment AX AY can be calculated from the results of using a single matching checker as the base checker The reference point is the detection position sought using matching and any one point can be selected from a maximum of 5 detection results Cape point AY Detection point Matching checker Theta rotation adjustment A210 only The amount of adjustment AX AY AB can be calculated from the results of using a single matching checker as the base checker The reference point is the detection position sought using matching and any one point can be selected from a maximum of 5 detection results The rotation angle is the difference between the detection angle when the reference was set up and the detection angle sought with this execution Reference point Detection point 4 13 Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 2 The Various Modes for Position Rotation Adjustment Checkers Matching checker One chec
237. oint Scanning direction Vertical scanning Scanning direction Edge detected Multichecker A210 A110 Binary Edge Checkers 9 1 Binary Edge Checkers 9 1 3 Select the Adjustment Group Set the adjustment checker that will adjust the binary edge checker to be created TYPE 1 34 BINARY EDGE DETECTION Jud HG No 4 xs oO Mie O dj Group 41 Pos Rot Adj Group 0 42 Expo Adj Group lt 0 0 gt 41 Position and Rotation Adjustment Group Set which position and rotation adjuster will adjust the binary edge checker being created 42 Exposure Adjustment Group Set which exposure adjuster will adjust the binary edge checker being created Binary Edge Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 9 2 Binary Edge Checker Setup 9 2 Binary Edge Checker Setup Procedure 1 Set number of the binary edge checker to be created 2 Select Checker Setting from the menu and then Shape 3 Select Shape from the menu and select either line scanning or plane scanning 4 Select Area from the menu and set the coordinates for the inspection area w See 2 11 Checker Area and Marker Area Setting Method for details of how to set the area 5 Select Direction from the menu and select either horizontal or vertical as the scanning direction eo Notes The scanning direction cannot be specified if line scanning has been selected With line scanning scanning proceeds along the line from the start point to
238. om among three execution modes per type to specify the execution order for an inspection checker With the Autom Switch Automatic Switch and User Defined modes all checkers in a type are broken into three blocks and the block to be executed is determined based on certain conditions Inspection checker block structure Checker Number A210 A110 Block 1 01 to 32 01 to 16 Block 2 33 to 64 17 to 32 Block 3 65 to 96 33 to 48 Take the blocks into consideration when setting checkers that will use Autom Switch Automatic Switch and User Defined modes The three execution modes Execute All mode The checkers for all blocks are executed in order Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 Autom Switch Automatic Switch mode After Block 1 is executed either Block 2 or Block 3 is executed in accordance with specified judgment output results OK Block 2 Block 1 gt Judgment ae output Gane ve NG Block 3 A110 JD16 User Defined mode Serial or parallel communication is used to specify which block is to be executed Block 1 External input Block 2 Parallel IN1 to IN2 No 3 Serial S Cp Block 3 1 to3 Multichecker A210 A110 Inspection Procedure Execute All mode The set checkers are executed in order Start V Block 1 numerical calculation
239. on data Use the cursor keys to select the results to be used in updating the deviation data then press ENTER A message will appear Select Yes to update data or No to leave data unchanged Put Deviation Data Restores deviation data to what it was before the last change was made Initialize Deviation Data Resets all deviation data to 1 0 Once the data is reset the values cannot be restored to what they were prior to the reset 12 14 Multichecker A210 A110 Smart Matching 12 1 Smart Matching 12 1 4 Check Template You can verify the set template image and the compressed image being processed Display the set template image by selecting Check Template and then Template Verify the search area compressed image and the template compressed image by selecting Check Template and then Middle Step Comp Template SESC 12 15 Smart Matching Multichecker A210 A110 12 1 Smart Matching 12 1 5 Result Displays the inspection results Displays the coordinates and rotation angle of the detected object and the correlated value Hulti Checker A200 Ver 1 2 TYPE 1 37 SHART HATCHING Jud 30K Detected 3 3Up Down Sub Area Corre 0 0 99 0 0 86 0 0 8 R Test B Pos MA Tine 626 0ns Display the detect point of the detected object by pressing B while the results are displayed When there is more than one detected object switch between them moving the cursor lever up and down
240. onditions The parameters for entering upper and lower limit values are normally displayed as in Max Min You can select which parameter you want to enter Max or Min and enter values 2 Slice Level No A 3 Checker Setting 4 Area Judgment lt 245760 0 gt 5 Adj Group Y ENTER 3 Checker Setting a Area Judgement lt 245760 0 gt 5 Adj Gr Area Judgment 6 Copy Max 7 Delete Min 0 0 Inspection Procedure Multichecker A210 A110 2 16 Copying a Checker 2 16 Copying a Checker Procedure 1 Set the number of the checker for the destination 2 Select Copy checker 3 Set the checker number for the source checker within the same type eS Note Only checker numbers that have already been set are displayed when you are selecting the copy source for the checker number If there are no source checkers an error message saying No checker for copying exists is displayed An error message is also displayed if there is not enough space for copying 4 A message saying Data exists in destination OK to overwrite is displayed Select and confirm Yes if you want to copy or NO to cancel the copying Multichecker A210 A110 Inspection Procedure 2 17 Deleting a Checker 2 17 Deleting a Checker Procedure 1 Set the number of the checker to be deleted 2 Select Delete checker and confirm 3 A message saying Delete is displayed Select and confirm Yes if you want to delete
241. onditions and set the base position osition Rotation Adjustment checker No 1 Vertical Detection Rotation Adjustment Group No 0 Set Position Rotation Adjustment Group No 0 Create Position Rotation Adjustment checker No 2 Select Gray Edge Position Adjustment mode ows OF ON A Set the Reference checker area and conditions and set the base position Position Rotation Adjustment checker No 1 Vertical Detection Rotation Adjustment Group No 0 Position Rotation Adjustment checker No 2 Position Adjustment Group No 1 8 Set Position Rotation Adjustment Group No 1 9 Create Smart Matching checker No 1 Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 4 Position Adjustment Groups 10 Setthe area and conditions for the checker Position Rotation Adjustment checker No 1 Vertical Detection Rotation Adjustment Group No 0 a Position Rotation Adjustment Smart Matching checker No 1 checker No 2 Group No 1 Position Adjustment Group No 1 11 Set Position Rotation Adjustment Group No 2 Upon execution Position Rotation Adjustment checker No 1 will execute and adjust Position Rotation Adjustment checker No 2 The adjustment amount of Position Rotation Adjustment checker No 2 will be used to adjust the Smart Matching checker so that inspection is performed in the best possible position Chapter 5 5 1 5 2 5 3 Exposure Adjustment Exposure Adj
242. only offers a high degree of precision in processing but also allows detection to be per formed reliably even in the face of fluctuations in brightness Binarization processing in the A210 A110 is carried out using gray scale mem ory data Binarization is a process whereby locations brighter than a specified brightness level are regarded as white while locations darker than the speci fied level are regarded as black The Multichecker uses binarization proces sing for line checkers binary window checkers binary edge checkers and fea ture extractors Because binarization processing uses the gray scale memory moving objects can be inspected by processing an image held in memory Gray scale processing gray scale data Binarization processing 4 256 gray scale Binarization Binary image gradations level 8 bits 512 pixels 480 pixels in the N Y direction irecti vertical horizontal i 2 19 Inspection Procedure Multichecker A210 A110 2 7 Specifying Position and Rotation Adjustment Group 2 7__Specifying Position and Rotation Adjustment Group For the A210 Sets the active position and rotation adjustment number within the type Only pre set position and rotation adjuster can be set here The corresponding position and rotation adjuster pattern is displayed brightly during number selection When changing the group number of a checker to which rotation adjustment has been applied or
243. onment and Type Multichecker A210 A110 Multichecker A210 A110 Environment and Type 3 1 Setting Item List 3 1 Setting Item List Environment settings setthe operating environment and are common for alltypes Type settings are set for each inspection target Setting item Setting menu Explanation page Camera settings Camera mode and type Environment Shutter speed Environment Camera selection when two are connected Type Scan method Scan start method Environment Setting the Execution Mode Type Image data save method Environment Status after Type selection at power up and type switching Environment power up Camera image selection at power up and type switch Type ing Display item selection at power up and type switching Type 3 26 Display settings Screen brightness setting Environment 3 14 Display item selection at power up Type 3 26 Communication Serial parallel settings Environment 3 13 16 5 senings Computer Link Environment 3 13 16 56 Type creation Create new type Type 3 20 Input type title Type 3 20 Delete type settings Type 3 25 Copy the settings for another type Type 3 24 Initialize all types delete all at once Type 3 28 Environment and Type Multichecker A210 A110 3 2 Environment Settings Environment settings common for all types 3 2 Environment Settings Environment settings common for all typ
244. onnected or if the setting for the capture camera in the Type menu is something other than AB it is not possible to select anything but A otherwise an error message will be displayed This is fixed at A for the A110 If you try to select a camera in this case the following message is displayed Inspection Procedure Multichecker A210 A110 2 10 Area Setup and Out of Area Range Setting 2 10 Area Setup and Out of Area Range Setting Area coordinates can be set in the ranges X 0 to 511 Y 0 to 479 When the area has been set correctly it is executed at the specified position from the next test If a checker area is moved the mask moves with it at the same time ESN Note If filtering with a 5 x5 erosion or dilation filter is set for a binary filter the coordinates can be set in the range X 2 to 509 Y 2 to 477 If an attempt is made to set coordinates outside the range available a Position is out of image range error is displayed and the coordinates return to those before the change was attempted For the A210 When the checker for area setup is automatically adjusted for rotation the display shows the state after adjustment The colour of the parts of the screen where there is no image is determined by the Outside Region Value set in the environment settings In the case of binary image processing checkers this also depends on the maximum and minimum setting values for the binary level groups
245. or NO to cancel the deleting i Note Note that all of the data that has been set for the specified checker number will be deleted when you execute Delete The checker number selection menu is displayed after deletion is complete Inspection Procedure Multichecker A210 A110 2 17 Deleting a Checker Chapter 3 3 1 3 3 Environment and Type Setting ltem EISE sea ee et 3 3 3 2 Environment Settings Environment settings common for all types 3 4 32 1 Men screen we cen dance es 3 4 32 2 gt Cameras dene sven tes ate pes Bees 3 5 III MONA sel Sot sige gatas aidan ee 3 6 3 2 4 Start Trigger 22 42 2 brid onde bars exe 3 7 325 Start TY DC seis chy Lali Bae Liked ee 3 12 3 2 6 Communication 00 cece eee 3 13 3 2 7 Display Setting eu tele hae alte Yale 3 14 3 2 8 Save Image Mode 3 15 3 2 9 INMBNIZE muss laser air Ne 3 17 TY POS nee a Dis 3 18 3 3 1 Menu Screen ante ne 3 18 3 3 2 Creating a New Type Number 3 20 3 3 3 Entering a Type Title 4 3 20 3 3 4 Setthe Capture Camera 3 21 3 3 5 Select the Camera Image 3 22 3 3 6 Switching Between Types 3 24 3 3 7 Copying a Type 22 ee 3 24 3 3 8 Deleting a Type 2 022222 nn 3 25 3 3 9 Selecting Initial Display Settings 3 26 3 3 10 Setting the Execution Mode 3 27 3 3 11 Initializing All Type Data 3 28 Envir
246. or move the mask area Object Binary Window Checkers Select whether to process white pixels or black pixels within the inspection area Filter Select whether to apply erosion or dilation filtering Select the Adjustment Group Set which adjustment checker will adjust the binary window checker to be created TYPE 1 32 BIHARY WINDOW Jud HG Ho 1 Areas S ENPE 51 Pos Rot Adj Group 0 52 Expo Adj Group lt 0 0 gt 51 52 Position and Rotation Adjustment Group Set which position and rotation adjuster will adjust the binary window checker to be created Exposure Adjustment Group Set which exposure adjustment checker will adjust the binary window checker to be created Binary Window Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 7 2 Binary Window Checker Setup 7 2__ Binary Window Checker Setup Procedure 1 Set the number of the binary window checker to be created 2 For the A210 select which camera A or B screen you will move the gray edge detection checker in This is fixed at A in the case of the A110 3 Select Slice Level No from the menu and select or confirm the slice level group A B C D E or F to be used by the binary window checker 4 Select or confirm Checker Setting then Shape 5 Set or confirm the shape as a rectangle circle or polygon 6 Select Area from the menu and set the coordinates for the checker area w See 2 11 Checker Area and Marker Area Setting Metho
247. ore 0 in the register for specifying communication format Register for specifying communication format D8120 or D5420 2 Restrictions that apply when the Allen Bradley SLC500 is used Use the following PLC settings Duplicate Detect OFF ACK Timeout x20 ms 20 Control Line NO HANDSHAKING Error Detect BCC NAK Retries 3 ENQ Retries 0 Embedded Responses AUTO DETECT The only register address that can be used is that for the integer register N7 16 58 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 13 Computer Link 16 13 3 Communication 1 Inspection result output PLC Imagechecker Outputs the Start READY ON Ready ON signal parallel START after confirming that Ready is on Ready OFF Image capture complete s Checker execution Numerical calculation 4 judgment output judgme R Result output Writes the result 4 to the specified Response data register Ready ON If the specified data register number is out of range the following command is returned by the PLC In this case communication stops the Error signal is output and Ready goes on Response EE 6103 LI L BCC If the communication times out the Error signal is output and Ready goes on a Fie Inspection start signal START C u a ON Ready signal READY ON m 4 2 T2 Error signal ERROR wN e ON T1 START signal width 1ms min T2 Response ti
248. ormed Mask area circle Mask area coordinates can be set in the range X 511 to 1022 Y 479 to 958 It is therefore possible to set the mask outside the screen area and as long as it remains within this range no error is produced if it is moved outside the screen area by an adjuster However if you are setting the mask area and it does not fall within the above range it will go back to the setup position A checker that generates an error when moved outside the screen area by an adjuster when an inspection is performed has its checker pattern displayed at the position where it was set The area setting is then made by changing the area from this position The checker will be executed from the same position where the area is set from the next time it is executed Since the area setting also applies to the next inspection it is sometimes the case that it is not possible to set the checker within the screen area because of the amount of adjustment The setting position cannot be set within the screen In this sort of situation the Position is out of image range message is displayed Move the area to the center of the screen before attempting the shape change again If the error occurs when the area is set the coordinates revert to the coordinates before the change was made Multichecker A210 A110 Inspection Procedure 2 13 Filter Setup 2 13 Filter Setup You can use filter processing with Smart Matching checkers
249. ou switch between types mw Refer to 3 3 9 Selecting Initial Display Settings for details Switching order for the monitor display items Procedure 1 Press C to open the Change Display menu Chg Disp and then use the cursor lever to select the items for display Chg Disp 1 Screen Display 2 Checker Pattern 3 Make Bright at NG 4 Detect Position 5 Status Display 6 Marker Main Menu Response No On Time On 2 Press ENTER to display the selection menus for each item Use the cursor lever to select the display content 1 Screen Display 2 Checker Pattern 3 Make Bright at NG Off Main Menu r Data Monitor Checker List Spreadsheet Off Fixed Response m Yes No Fixed at No when the checker pattern display is set to off 4 Detect Position Off On Fixed at Off when the checker pattern display is set to Fixed 5 Status Display 6 Marker m Off Outputs Time r Off On 3 Press ENTER to confirm your selection Press C to update the monitor display 1 10 Multichecker A210 A110 Screens and Basic Operations 1 3 Main Screen Operations Display content Screen Display Select one of Main Menu Data Monitor Checker List or Spreadsheet or select Off to display nothing Main Menu Displays the menus for performing settings and inspection w Refer to 27 Menu Layout Data Monitor Refer to 13 6 Data Monitor Checker
250. pecified are not detected Filter 10 30 Scanning direction gt left to right Edge condition W gt B x Tas Filter setting Filter setting Filter setting Filter parameter 10 10 lt Filter parameter S 30 Filter parameter gt 30 Edge detected at Edge detected at position No edge detected position marked marked The filter parameter places conditions on the depth in the scanning direction so that areas less than the minimum depth specified are not detected Binary Edge Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 9 1 A F Binary Edge Checkers Tip Checker area start point end point and edge detection conditions Checkers are drawn by specifying the start point and end point of a rectangle These are displayed on the screen as a transparent square start point and a solid square end point When in specting the area defined it is scanned from the start point to the end point After drawing the checker specify whether the edge to be detected is a transition from white to black or a transition from black to white The scanning direction and edge detection condi tion are vital parameters edge detection Make sure to set them correctly Horizontal Not detected Vertical Not detected Edge detected Not detected Not detected Horizontal scanning Start PS End p
251. pecify the block No Block 1 No 1 specified Block 2 No 2 specified Block 3 No 3 specified l Adjustment checker Adjustment checker Adjustment checker A Inspection checker Inspection checker Inspection checker Numerical calculation Numerical calculation Numerical calculation Y i V V Judgment output Judgment output Judgment output EEE ARE SA yV _ Result output Result output Result output V VY End End V End 2 10 Multichecker A210 A110 Inspection Procedure 2 2 Inspection Execution Procedures Starting block specification using the keypad when User Defined mode is selected Even with no external devices connected it is possible to use the keypad as follows to specify and execute a block including external output Select User Defined from 1 Type 7 Execution mode Procedure 1 Press A in the main menu Screen Display Ready signal On A Start B lmage C Chg Disp 2 Select a block for execution using the A B or C keys A Block 1 B Block 2 C Block 3 Selecting the execution block No Ready signal Off A U Def 1 B U Def 2 C U Def 3 Inspection will be performed using the specified block number 3 After execution of inspection by
252. per and lower limits and makes the lands within that range as the target object s Both the upper and lower limits can be set in the range 1 to 245 760 upper limit lower limit 11 3 Feature Extraction Multichecker A210 A110 11 1 Feature Extraction 6 Adjustment Group Set whether or not the checker being created will be adjusted by a position and rotation adjuster or exposure adjuster 7 Result Display a table of information about the detected lands up to a maximum of 99 lands 8 Copy Checker When creating a checker copy the data from an existing checker 9 Delete Checker Delete the checker 11 1 2 Checker Setting Create the feature extractor and set judgment conditions etc 31 32 33 34 35 36 TYPE i 36 FEATURE EXTRACTIOH Jud HG Ho 1 Detected 0 EMMMChecker Setting 3 pej Rect 32 Area 206 200 305 279 33 Mask Shape 34 Mask Area i 35 Object 36 Condition 37 Output Unit Shape Select the shape for the feature extractor area Area Create or move the feature extractor area Mask Shape Select the shape for the mask area Mask Area Create or move the mask area Object Select whether processing in the inspection area is performed on white pixels or black pixels Condition Set the conditions for the feature extractor 11 4 Multichecker A210 A110 Feature Extraction 11 1 Feature Extraction 37 Output Unit Set the condition
253. played so that the angle of rotation comes to 0 degrees 2 Binary checker with filtering specified The filtered image is displayed 3 Binary checker adjusted with an exposure adjuster An image with the adjusted binarization level is displayed If the conditions in 1 2 and 3 are satisfied the image is displayed with all those conditions present Inspection Procedure Multichecker A210 A110 2 10 Area Setup and Out of Area Range Setting For the A110 For checkers that generate an error at execution due to correction resulting in the image moving off the screen the checker pattern is displayed at the setting position For the area settings at such times changes in the area are done from this position The same applies for the next executed checker at the position of the area setting In some cases due to the next execution position and depending on the amount of correction area settings may not be possible even though they are inside the screen cases when the setting position cannot be set inside the screen In such cases the error message Position is out of image range is displayed If the error occurs when you are making area settings the area coordinates are returned to their original values os Checker area N Mask area x Image There are some situations in which an error is not generated when achecker is adjusted out ofthe screen area by a position adjuster In these situations the
254. r display setting procedure Checker LIST reri sn ln si me Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 13 2 Multichecker A210 A110 Optional Memory 13 1 Inspection Results and Output 13 1 Inspection Results and Output In addition to displaying inspection results on the screen it is also possible to output them to external equipment and to perform numerical calculations on the results and create judgment programs to judge the results Checker screen displays gt See or OK NG Data Monitor Numerical value or OK NG Spreadsheet Checker List OK NG ER Judgment Output OK NG Judgment Condition Program gt 13 4 2 Numerical Calculation Program gt 13 3 2 13 6 Conversion data gt 13 5 13 2 Inspection result gt 13 7 gt 13 4 the relevant Numerical value checker chapter 13 3 Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 13 2 Conversion Data 13 2 Conversion Data 13 2 1 Conversion Data This function is useful when you wish to replace the number of measured pixels with the actual dimensions You can set up to four sets of conversion data for one controller so it is possible to set them separately for the vertical and horizontal directions and to use for conversion of units Conversion Data No Conversion data can be used in numerical calculations Specify this number when you wish to use the conversion data in a for
255. r more information 17 4 Chapter 18 Error Output 18 1 Error Processing een 18 3 18 2 Error Signal Output Conditions Parallel 18 4 Error Output Multichecker A210 A110 18 2 Multichecker A210 A110 Error Output 18 1 Error Processing 18 1 Error Processing If a problem occurs when using the A210 A110 Multichecker V2 for inspection an error signal is output In this happens check the error result and perform appropriate processing on the external equipment Error Output Multichecker A210 A110 18 2 Error Signal Output Conditions 18 2 Error Signal Output Conditions Type switching When by parallel input attempting to switch to a type that has not been set Data output when handshaking is not performed during execution When an error occurs in the numerical calculation register or judgment register When image capture fails Data output when handshaking is performed during execution Error signal When an error occurs in the numerical calculation register or judgment register When image capture fails When a handshaking timeout occurs Overflow signal When the numerical calculation register set for output overflows Output data length 32 bit When the numerical calculation register set for output overflows or result of calculation is negative Output data length 8 bit 16 bit When an error occurs in the numerical calculation register set for ou
256. r pattern is displayed along with straight lines to mark the positions where edges were detected The straight lines are not displayed if no edge is found A v Example Gray scale edge checker pattern display Edge detected here Feature extractor display The checker pattern is displayed along with marks that show position of the centre of gravity of each land detected The marks are not displayed if no land is found When operating from the Feature Extraction menu the marks rotate according to the angle of the principal axis A v Example Feature extractor pattern display Centres of lands detected Smart Matching marks are displayed at the positions specified as the output points for the checker pattern and pattern If no pattern was detected marks are not displayed i Note When position adjustment is used the checker is displayed at a position that has been moved by the amount of correction If the position after correction is off screen the checker is displayed at the position where it was set Checker pattern display when Autom Switch Automatic Switch and User Defined modes are selected Only the checker pattern for the executed block is displayed When 3 Checker in the main menu is selected all checkers are executed and all checker patterns are displayed 2 15 Inspection Procedure Multichecker A210 A110 2 6 Slice Levels Binarization Levels 2 6 Slice Lev
257. raction Multichecker A210 A110 11 1 Feature Extraction 364 Theta Select whether or not to obtain the inertial axis Obtaining the trigonometric ratios of the inertial axis of an object enables the angle of the principal axis to be detected Inertial axis The angle of the inertial axis is negative when oriented into the first or third quadrant and positive when oriented into the second or fourth quadrant Point Inertial axis If the rotational inertia moments moment of inertia about the centre of gravity of straight lines passing through the centre of gravity Xg Yg of a figure are obtained the line with the least iner tial moment indicates and can be used to detect the angle of the figure The angle between the X axis and the line is the inertial axis angle and the line indicates the orientation of the principal axis of inertia The turning moment for a line can be calculated from the square of the distance from a point X Y to the straight line times the weight 1 in this case due to black white binarization Calculating the detected inertial moments of lines in this way the principal axis of inertia is defined as the line passing through the centre of gravity which has the smallest moment of inertia The angle between the X axis and the principal axis of inertia is the iner tial axis angle theta Y axis X axis Centre o gravity Xg Yg Principal axis of inertia 11 8 Mult
258. ration input signal IN8 again When re registration is complete the READY signal goes on 16 42 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 7 Template Smart matching Re registration Adjustment position Re registration Area Display No Procedure 1 4 Specify the template number for performing re registration and input template re registration input signal IN8 READY signal goes off and the position adjustment checker registered for the position adjustment group No of the specified smart matching checker is executed and the smart matching is adjusted Re registration is executed at the position of the smart matching that was adjusted in step 2 and the positional relationship between the first registered search area and the template is maintained When re registration is complete the READY signal goes on Adjustment position Re registration Area Display Yes Procedure 1 Specify the template number for performing re registration and input template re registration input signal IN8 2 READY signal goes off and the position adjustment checker registered for the position adjustment group No of the specified smart matching checker is executed and the smart matching is adjusted 3 Re registration is executed at the position of the smart matching that was adjusted in step 2 and the template position whose positional relationship with the first registered search area has been main
259. rd 2 Ifthe entered password is correct you will be prompted to enter the new password Set a password of your choice between 1 and 10 digits EMMMICHANGE PASSHORD j 7 4 1 0 Conp leted Please input new password 3 You will be prompted to enter the new password a second time for confirmation Enter the new password again If you make a mistake entering the new password the password will not be changed 5 SO eaeess msn 4 0 Del Conp leted To make sure please input password again If You Forget Your Password Please contact Matsushita Electric Works 15 15 Useful Functions Multichecker A210 A110 15 4 Executing a Group Move 15 4_Executing a Group Move Group move is a function for moving a group of already specified checkers that have the same position and rotation adjuster number Procedure 1 Select GROUP MOVE from the Checker menu TYPE 1 4 GROUP MOVE EXPOSURE ADJ LINE BINARY WINDOW GRAY WINDOW BINARY EDGE DETECTION GRAY EDGE DETECTION FEATURE EXTRACTION SMART MATCHING Group No Set the position and rotation adjustment group number for the checkers to be moved as a group 0 Move all checkers with position and rotation adjustment group set to 0 1 to 96 1 to 48 for the A110 Move all checkers adjusted by the specified position and rotation adjustment group number Type of checker Select the types of checkers for group
260. re Adjustment Checker Setting Create the check area and set the coefficient for reflecting the amount of exposure adjustment in the binarization level 21 22 23 TYPE 1 2 EXPOSURE ADJ Jud HG Ho i Average 0 Corr Value 2 Ele 21i Shape Rect 200 200 305 279 23 Coefficient 100 Shape The exposure adjuster can only be set as a square Area Create or move the checker area Coefficient Set the coefficient for reflecting the amount of exposure adjustment in the binarization level The exposure adjusted binarization level is calculated as shown below Adjusted binarization level Binarization level setting Ave gray scale value ref value x Adjustment coefficient For 1 1 adjustment of binarization level relative to variations in brightness set the coefficient to 100 For 1 2 adjustment set it to 200 and for 1 0 5 adjustment set it to 50 The initial value of the exposure adjustment coefficient is 100 and it can be set in the range 0 to 200 Exposure Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 5 2 Exposure Adjustment Setup 5 2 ___ Exposure Adjustment Setup Procedure 1 Set the number of the exposure adjuster to be created 2 Select Checker Setting then Area 3 Set the inspection area Set the inspection area coordinates in Area wm See 2 11 Checker Area Setting Method for details on area settings 4 Set how the exposure adjustment will be appli
261. red Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 4 Next perform the checker settings Select Checker Setting to display the setting menu 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 Matching One Chkr Rot 12 Checker Setting 21 Template earch Area j 0 0 511 479 Sequence Output Unit Check Template 21 Template 22 Search Area 23 Sequence 24 Output Unit 25 Check Template Set each of the items For details regarding the settings refer to 12 1 2 Checker Settings and 12 1 4 Check Template in 12 Smart Matching Note however there is no Rotation Setting in Sequence and no Theta setting in the Sorting item of Output Unit re Note In the case of Two Checker Rotation Adjustment Checker 1 and Checker 2 are displayed The menu screens are the same as above Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 5 Set the base position Select Base Pos and press the A Test key to display the current detection coordinates detection angles and correlation values a maximum of five Set base point 1 and base point 2 from among these 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 Matching One Chkr Rot 4 GORKIS lt Ref Point no Co Co Theta Come a 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 Matching One Chkr Rot 4 Ball lt Ref Point no Co X Ca Theta
262. register it If you want to modify the numerical calculation program press ENTER to display setting items and edit it using the same procedure that you would use to create a program 13 16 Multichecker A210 A110 Optional Memory 13 3 Numerical Calculation Setting and Canceling Output Control Restrict output of numerical calculation registers that you do not want to output over the serial or parallel interface Procedure 1 2 Select the register No of the program you do not want to output oo Use the cursor lever to move the highlight cursor to any location other than then press A An X mark is displayed at the left of the register No A OutpContr B Delete CoN EKG E02011 else ah If a register has been specified for output control but you want to change the setting so that it can be output move the highlight cursor to any location other than then press A again and the X mark disappears enabling numerical calculation output for that program 07 F 02011 eich eh Even if a formula is set and the Serial Output settings in the Environment menu are set to output a numerical calculation the results of numerical calculation registers that have an x is displayed in front of the register are not output 13 17 Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 13 3 Numerical Calculation Setting and Deleting a Specific Substitution When creating a numerical calculation
263. rge difference in gray scale is produced making inspection less reliable Adjust the lighting to ensure uniformity Pressing B Live Image displays a live image direct from the camera Lighting not uniform Uniform lighting H D1 D3 D5 D7 READY Q D Difference in gray scale level 19 4 Multichecker A210 A110 The Setting Help Tools 19 1 Use Setting Help Tools to Adjust Settings Before Inspecting 2 Focus Helps you adjust the focus correctly by watching a bar graph on the screen while turning the focus ring on the camera lens 1 Select 2 Focus and a screen such as Figure a is displayed Press A Chg Area to set the area of the image with the required feature 2 Following the instructions turn the focus ring all the way in either direction then press ENTER Figure b 3 Next turn the focus ring all the way in the other direction then press ENTER again Figure c 4 Looking at the bar graph on screen turn the focus ring to a position where Focus is adjusted is displayed and adjust the ring to the position where the bar in the bar graph is closest to 100 Figure d Figure a Figure b 8 SETTING HELP TOOLS 8 SETTING HELP TOOLS Turn the Focus Rinz to the one Turn the Focus Ring ta the one end direction then push Enter Key end direction then push Enter Key M100 sche Area B Figure c Figure d 8 SETTING HELP TOOLS 8 SETTING HELP TOOLS Focus is adjusted Turn the Focus Ring
264. rt matching A210 judgement learning function by the smart template Gray scale edge detection sub pixel processing 96 type max 48 type max Scanning method individual projection Gray scale filter width function Detection by sub pixel unit Detection position forepoint forepoint and afterpoint largest differential multiple edge Gray scale window 96 type max 48 type max Shape rectangular polygonal or oval Mask shape rectangular polygonal or oval Gray scale mean value detection judgement Feature extraction 96 type max 48 type max Shape rectangular polygonal or oval Mask shape rectangular polygonal or oval Image filtering Labeling Output values counter centre of gravity to one decimal place area projection width principle axis angle Binary window 96 type max 48 type max Shape rectangular polygonal or oval Mask shape rectangular polygonal or oval Image filtering White black pixel number count judgment Binary edge 96 type max 48 type max detection Shape line plane Filter width functions Forepoint edge detection 96 type max 48 type max Line Shape straight line polygonal line circle or arc Image filters White black pixel number count judgment Conversion data 4 unit Reference distance No of reference pixels Scale factor Numerical calculations 96 type max 48 type max 4 arithmetic calculations
265. s Copy When you are creating a program it is possible to copy a program set in another register and use it IE Note In screens that display A Start external start signals can also be accepted Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 13 3 Numerical Calculation Data Bit Sets the data length for when you will output numerical calculation results using parallel output Select 8 16 or 32 bits in accordance with the range of numerical values that you will output However it is only possible to set one data length for the four registers that are displayed at one time e g if CA01 to CA04 are displayed it is not possible to set CA01 to 8 bits and CAO2 to 16 bits The ranges that can be handled by the different data bit sizes are as follows 8 bit 0 to 255 16 bit 0 to 65535 32 bit 2147483648 to 2147483647 External output registers that are not set are skipped during output Output data length Output port output pin No 8 bit data output pin No D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 dB a1 dal a7 de as aa as a2 a1 16 bit data output pin No D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 ds d7 de as da ds day ai arqat gat gaigaiqatard as 32 bit data output pin No D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 d32 ds dr de as d4 as a2 a1 a1 6fd1 5fa1 lat 3fa12 a14 a1q a9 d 0 16 d 1 5jd1 44d1 3 d11 d1q ldzqdaqaaqazildad aiqaiqdt7 lasqa3jasqaadaed a2 a2q a24 Data and operators that can be referenced mw Ref
266. s There are two checker settings in the case of two checker rotation adjustment but the setting method is the same as for one checker rotation adjustment The following example illustrates one checker rotation adjustment Procedure 1 Select the Position Rotation Adjustment Checker number TYPE 1 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 BINARY EDGE DETECTION 2 GRAY EDGE DETECTION 3 FEATURE EXTRACTION 4 MATCHING 2 Select FEATURE EXTRACTION 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 13 FEATURE EXTRACTION 31 One Chkr Pos Adj 32 Theta Rot zen One O e 34 Two Chkr Rot Adj Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 3 Select One Chkr Rot Adj The setting menu for theta rotation adjustment using feature extraction is displayed Use Select Camera to select the camera and Delete Checker to delete the checker as required 1 POS ROT ADJ Jud NG No 1 Feat Extr One Chkr Rot Checker Setting Slice Level No Base Pos Pos Rot Adj Group Delete Checker 1 Select Camera Select either the camera A or camera B image for operating the Position Adjustment checker 2 Checker Setting Use this to create the checker and set items such as the scan conditions IE Note In the case of two checker rotation adjustment Checker 1 and Checker 2 are displayed 3 Slice Level No Select the Slice Level No for the base checker
267. s after a group move when several checkers have been moved at once the move is canceled for all checkers and they return to their positions before the move When A is pressed to execute a group move in some cases an error message is displayed and the move does not occur When the checkers being moved are adjusted by a position and rotation adjuster to that the X coordinate is outside the range 0 to 511 or the Y coordinate is outside the range 0 to 479 When the mask areas for the checkers being moved are adjusted by a position and rotation adjuster to that the X coordinate is outside the range 511 to 1022 or the Y coordinate is outside the range 479 to 958 When the checkers to be moved are adjusted by a position and rotation adjuster and that position and rotation adjuster has generated an error When no checkers exist for the specified position and rotation adjuster group 15 17 Useful Functions Multichecker A210 A110 15 4 Executing a Group Move 15 18 Chapter 16 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 1 16 2 16 3 16 4 Communications Function 2222er 16 5 Communication SettingS cee enna 16 8 16 2 1 The Communication Menu 16 8 16 2 2 Com Mode souisse walore aka eal 16 9 162 39 CHS232C ea a ea E a eis 16 10 16 2 4 Serial Output Settings Normal Mode 16 12 16 2 5 Serial Output Settings Computer Link 16 13 16 2 6 Parallel Output Se
268. s automatically calculated The threshold level setting help tool is used when there is good contrast with a clear distinction between black and white F Note With regard to the values recommended here the binary level setting is not automatically done so set the displayed values as the binary level settings 1 Select 4 Threshold Level and a screen such as the one below is displayed Press A Chg Area to set the area of the image for extraction 2 After a few seconds the lower value for the recommended threshold level is displayed as shown below and the image produced by utilizing that threshold level is displayed The upper threshold for the image on the screen is 255 and the lower threshold is the value displayed 3 Use the cursor lever for fine adjustment of the threshold level _ BISETTING HELP TOOLS Area The Setting Help Tools Multichecker A210 A110 19 1 Use Setting Help Tools to Adjust Settings Before Inspecting 5 Multi Threshold Recommended threshold level is automatically calculated The multi threshold level tool is used when the distinction between black and white is unclear in images with grays and other intermediate colors The image produced by utilizing the recommended threshold levels is displayed as white on the screen IE Note With regard to the values recommended here the binary level setting is not automatically done so set the displayed values as the binary level settings
269. s for each type are stored in the QS register You can perform numerical calculations on the final data The markings for numerical operations in spreadsheets are as follows Content No of scans No of OK outputs No of NG outputs OK average NG average OK dispersion NG dispersion OK maximum value NG maximum value o CO N oO oO A j N OK minimum value fo NG minimum value 11 OK range 12 NG range 13 35 Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 13 6 Data Monitor 13 6 Data Monitor The Data Monitor function displays the results of numerical calculations and judgment outputs in a list It is also possible to change the maximum and minimum values for the numerical calculations to be displayed You can register up to 20 items 10 items page x 2 pages with titles of up to 8 characters symbols Use 4 Data Monitor to set the items to be displayed then use the Menu Setting item in 1 Type to set the Screen Display to Data Monitor 13 6 1 The Data Monitor display The inspection result values are displayed with their titles Up to 10 items can be displayed on each page TYPE 1 Pagei lt Hide Next Turn page WIDTH1 0 NG HIGHT 0 NG Data display 10 items per page Numerical calculation judgment result Title 8 characters Numerical calculation result Block 1 to Block 3 status up to 6
270. s for the feature extractor TYPE 1 36 FEATURE EXTRACTION Jud HG Ho 1 Detected 0 EMMMChecker Setting 37 Wadia lees 371 Sorting Ho 372 Sorting Order Des Set whether or not to sort the data according to individual feature amounts area of individual lands or X and Y coordinates of the centre of gravity for output of the calculated feature amounts i Note Only set the processing conditions and data output conditions which are required Requiring all conditions increases processing time 11 5 Feature Extraction Multichecker A210 A110 11 1 Feature Extraction 11 1 3 Condition Setting Set the conditions for feature extractor TYPE 1 36 FEATURE EXTRACTION Jud HG Ho 1 Detected 0 EMMMChecker Setting 361 gt Note 86 Blast Yes 362 Boundary On 363 Perin Proj Yes 364 Theta Yes 365 Filter Ho Labeling Within the feature extraction area each block of the colour being inspected black or white is individually recognized and its data handled individually Labeling Yes Handle each of the separate block of the colour being inspected as individual lands within the feature extraction area Count of lands and individual land information are available Labeling No Total all the objects of the colour being inspected within the feature extraction area treating them as a single object Count of lands and individual land information are not available The total area of obj
271. s set for camera A execute AB Horizontal Camera A captures the top half of the image and camera B I Notes captures the bottom half and the image is composed as a memory camera A image Only the checkers set for camera A execute If you are only connecting one camera connect it to the Camera A port Capture errors may occur if you connect it to the Camera B port Only one internal synchronizing camera can be connected so only A can be selected When the settings for the capture camera are changed all stored image data including locked data is erased In the case that an external device switches the type set for the capture camera to a different type image capture is not performed when the type is switched Therefore in the case that the display image of the changed type is a memory image after the type is switched no image is displayed until the next image is captured Environment and Type Multichecker A210 A110 3 3 Types 3 3 5 Select the Camera Image Select the camera image to be displayed on the monitor The display selected here takes priority when the power is switched on or the type is switched the display camera and image change settings done with the B button in the main menu are temporary settings that remain valid until the power is switched off or the type is changed The menus differ depending on the settings made in Capture Camera Capture Camera settings Disp Image A Cam
272. s steps Use this setting when the inspection execution time is fast the Ready OFF time is short and the external device cannot detect the end of execution The initial setting is Oms The Ready OFF times are applied in all cases except the following Menu selection Switching images or displays by pressing either Bor C Inspection execution initiated using the Start trigger VBT mode 3 13 Environment and Type Multichecker A210 A110 3 2 Environment Settings Environment settings common for all types 3 2 7 Display Setting Sets the screen display 7 ENVIRONMENT Display Setting Image Dark 62 Outside Region Value 0 63 Language English 61 Display Brightness This function changes the display brightness Select either Normal or Image Dark The initial setting is Normal and when Image Dark is selected the screen is made darker but the brightness of the text in the menus etc remains the same this setting has no effect on actual inspection However this setting only applies to gray images and the brightness is not changed in the case of binary images Select Image Dark when a bright whitish image is being displayed and the white menu text is difficult to read 62 Outside Region Value Only for the A210 Displays the image rotated image minus the adjustment amount when displaying an area checker with a rotation adjustment amount The results of the rotation as well as areas outside the scre
273. screen 1 POS ROT ADJ Jud NG nX 0 No 1 nY 0 m Adjustment amounts Gray Edge Pos Adj n6 0 0 1 Select Camera 2 Horizontal Checker 3 Vertical Checker 4 Priority No 6 7 61 3 38 0 89 3 0 Pos Rot Adj Group Delete Checker Im B lmage Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 4 3 4 Setting a Horizontal Detection Rotation Adjustment Checker or a Vertical Detection Rotation Adjustment Checker that uses Gray Edge Detection A210 only This explains how to use a Gray Scale Edge checker as an adjustment checker If you are unfamiliar with the operation of Gray Edge checkers read 10 Gray Scale Edge Checkers The setting method for the two checker types is identical and you must set two checkers In this example we will perform the settings for a Horizontal Detection Rotation Adjustment Checker Procedure 1 Select the Position Rotation Adjustment Checker number TYPE 1 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 BINARY EDGE DETECTION 2 GRAY EDGE DETECTION 3 FEATURE EXTRACTION 4 MATCHING 2 Select GRAY EDGE DETECTION 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 12 Fela ple a 55 en 0 21 Pos Adj 22 Hor Det Rot Adj 23 Ver Det Rot Adj Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 3 Select Hor Det Rot Adj The setting menu for position adj
274. splay the setting screen for the following five data items Press ENTER to display the register selection window TYPE 1 4 DATA MONITOR Page 1 Upper lt Page 2 Title OCA JR JD 13 38 Multichecker A210 A110 Optional Memory 13 6 Data Monitor 3 Use the cursor lever to select the register to display in the Data Monitor and confirm the selection Example Select CAO1 Title OCA JR JD 4 Title OCA JR JD 4 After you select a register the title input window will appear Input a title of up to eight characters in length The default initial setting is the register name TYPE 1 4 DATA MONITOR Page 1 Upper lt Page AlB c D E F G H Space Dei fai kit mINlo plr e ol R s T ul vi wx 4 5 6 KZEIENEZEIEIETENEIEIEIEN Input is completed Input Use the cursor lever to select and confirm the characters to input Space Use the cursor lever to select Space and confirm to input a space Delete the previous character Use the cursor lever to select and Del and confirm to delete the previous character 13 39 Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 13 6 Data Monitor 5 When you have finished entering the title use the cursor lever to select Input Complete and confirm to display the title that you input TYPE 1 4 DATA MONITOR Page 1 Upper lt Page CAOT WIDTH A Lock B Delete C Esc lt A Lock gt It is possible to lock the
275. stance OO CO N OD oO A WO N OF BR W MM OF AJ WO NM Nth Y axis projection distance Notes 1 1 indicates Standard Checker 1 and 2 indicates Standard Checker 2 or 1 indicates Horizontal Checker and 2 indicates Vertical Checker 2 The result is multiplied by a factor of 10 3 For Binary Edge the result is as is and for other it is multiplied by a factor of 10 4 The number of detections can only be referenced when the Object No is specified as No 1 6 A210 only The result is multiplied by a factor of 10 13 21 Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 13 3 Numerical Calculation Program Symbol Checker Smart Matching A210 Checker Number A110 in brackets 01 to 96 Reference Data Number of detections 01 to 64 Nth correlation value Nth X coordinate Nth Y coordinate Nth detection angle Nth differential area value Nth X axis projection distance Nth Y axis projection distance Matching A110 01 to 48 Number of detections 01 to 64 Nth correlation value Nth X coordinate Nth Y coordinate AJ OO N o NJ o oO AJ Ww m o Nth detection angle Numerical Calculation 01 to 96 01 to 48 Numerical calculation data register Previous Numerical Calculation Result 01 to 96 01 to 48 Numerical calculation data register prev
276. starting from the data register number 15 Command EE WDD00015000781234 5678 a first time E L_ LI a L Delimiter Data 1 Data 24 Response EEBCC amp Ca transmit request Command EE26data block amp Ge second time Response EEBCC amp C transmit request Command EE14data block amp third time Response EE WDBCC oe command receive complete Read from PLC command Use the following command to read from the PLC Command EE RDD0000100001 Cg REN S E IL ILJ Fixed unit No Read command ER Data code Ignore BCC specification Start register End register Response REESADISHEGEN command receive complete io l Query data reversal of upper and lower positions is required P 16 65 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 13 Computer Link 16 66 Chapter 17 Vision Backup Tool Ver 2 17 1 Vision Backup ToolVer 2 0 ccc eee eee 17 3 Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 17 2 Multichecker A210 A110 Optional Memory 17 1 Vision Backup Tool Ver 2 17 1 Vision Backup Tool Ver 2 The Vision Backup Tool Ver 2 VBT Ver 2 connects to a computer with a serial cable and makes it possible to download and upload as well as copy or delete types environments and image data stored in the Imagechecker from a computer Communications environment Communications environment settings o
277. sword input screen appears MBE XECUT ION 2 INITIALIZATION 3 CHANGE PASSHORD Conpleted Please input password Use the cursor lever to enter the password selecting one character at a time If you make a mistake select Del and the last character entered will be deleted After you have entered the entire password select Completed and press ENTER i Note You can set the password to anything between one and ten digits 15 11 Useful Functions Multichecker A210 A110 15 3 Hide Setting 15 3 2 Entering Hide Settings Mode Procedure 1 Select Execution and the following screen appears i Bas 2 INITIALIZATION 3 CHANGE PASSHORD Del Conpleted Please input password 2 Enter the correct password to enter hide settings mode TYPE SLICE LEVEL CHECKER DATA MONITOR SPREADSHEETS CONVERSION DATA ENVIRONMENT HIDE SETTING SAVE DATA 10 SETTING HELP TOOLS oo A ON Ee A Set Rel B C Restore 3 Ifyou press A an x will appear in the box to the left of the number of the line where the cursor is placed and Hide is set Press A again to remove the x and cancel the Hide setting Menus marked with the x will not be displayed in normal settings mode 15 12 Multichecker A210 A110 Useful Functions 15 3 Hide Setting If all the submenu items in a particular menu are marked the menu itself will be marked automatically Lower level menu
278. t command Clears spreadsheet scanning and error counts averages dispersions maximum and minimum values and ranges Q CR ICH to External device Spreadsheets data reset answer command Output after spreadsheet reset has completed Z CR ICH to External device Data not registered error command Output if the type number for type switching the register No for reference or modification of the maximum and minimum limits for a numerical calculation or the checker No for Character Verification checker reference image re registra tion are not registered yet Also output if camera switching could not be executed ICH to External device Data code error command Output when an undefined command is trans mitted or an illegal setting is specified for the type a numerical operator or checker No e g D F50 017 etc 1 This command can be invoked even when menus other than the main menu such as the Numerical Calc Output and Spreadsheets menus are displayed 16 18 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel eS Notes 16 3 Serial Parallel Communication Command Tables Perform serial communications using the main menu with READY in the on state Transmission of data at speeds of 19 200bps or greater is not supported by some hardware and or software and may not work correctly Be certain to test the transmission under actual operating conditions before use
279. t point L Lo Loo E End point Black land Black land Black land One or more white pixels meets the condition of the gap filter so is regarded as a gap Black dot count 12 Land count 3 3 Land filter 3 gap filter 5 Start point l End point Black land Less than three black pixels Less than five white pixels does not meet the condition does not meet the condition of the land filter so is not of the gap filter so is not regarded as a land regarded as a gap Black dot count 12 Lands on an arc Land countat If a circular line checker is set up as shown below the number of white lands may be reported as two This is because it is inspected as if it were a single line with a white block at each end N E Line Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 6 2 Line Checker Setup 6 2 Line Checker Setup Procedure 1 Set number of the line checker to be created 2 Select Slice Level No from the menu and select or confirm the slice level group A B C D E or F to be used by the line checker 3 Select Checker Setting then Shape 4 Set the inspection area from Shape 5 Select Area from the menu and set the coordinates for the inspection area w See 2 11 Checker Area and Marker Area Setting Method for details of how to set the area 6 Select Dot Count from the menu and set the colour of pixels counted to white or black 7 Select Land Count from the menu and set the colour of pixels counted to
280. tained is displayed as the re registration area 4 Input template re registration input signal IN8 again 5 Re registration is executed at the position of step 3 and when it is complete the READY signal goes on Notes Templates other than those of the current type cannot be re registered Perform re registration when the main screen READY signal is in the on state The template is registered as a gray image regardless of the image displayed on the monitor Registration is possible if you capture a new image when the monitor display image is a Thru image but if it is a Mem image re registration is executed using the currently displayed image The re registered template will be lost if the power is switched off If you wish to keep it perform a data save before switching the power off 16 43 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 8 Switching the Display Camera A210 only 16 8 Switching the Display Camera A210 only This function uses external input serial or parallel to switch the camera image displayed on the monitor Switching execution time Approximately 270ms max The execution time is heavily influenced by the following settings so confirm in actual operation Camera type Standard Double speed random Camera settings Frame Field The display camera images before and after switching Screens for which switching is possible Switch
281. tal checker and the coordinate obtained by the vertical checker The distance between the reference point and the detection point is the amount of adjustment Vertical checker Reference point Horizontal checker A Reference point Detection position Detection position Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 2 The Various Modes for Position Rotation Adjustment Checkers Gray scale edge checker Horizontal detection rotation adjustment A210 only Gray scale edge checkers are used as the base checkers and the amount of adjustment AX A angle of rotation is calculated from the results of two horizontal checkers Shapes available are lines and planes with a mixture of the two being possible Since the amount of adjustment is calculated from the results of two base checkers the reference position cannot be set unless two checkers are set Edge detection is performed in Front detection position mode The reference point is the centre point of the coordinate obtained by checker 1 and the coordinate obtained by checker 2 Gray scale edge checker 1 for rerference i Gray scale edge checker 2 for rerference Base checker 1 Detection position Reference point I Base checker 2 r Detection position Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 2 The Various Modes for Position Rotation Adjustment Checkers Gray scale edge checker Vertical detection rotation a
282. tart B Reset da Tine 0 0ns 1 Scan Times Counts the total number of scans for all executions However the number of scans will not be counted if no checkers are registered The maximum count is 2 147 483 647 Scans that exceed this maximum will not be counted 2 Error Times Counts the number of errors generated number of times that the parallel error signal was output 3 Reference checker Sets and displays a checker for referencing Move the cursor to this location and press ENTER to display a list of the checker numbers Select the checker that you want to reference Up to a maximum of 40 checkers can be referenced 13 33 Optional Memory Multichecker A210 A110 13 5 Spreadsheets 4 Data items Count Average Dispersal Maximum Minimum Range Counts the OK and NG judgments of the designated checker data Records the average of the OK and NG judgments of the designated checker data Records the dispersal value ofthe OK and NG judgments of the designated checker data The dispersal value is calculated from the following formula Dispersal value Z Xn Xave X Xn Xave n Shows the maximum number of OK and NG judgments for the designated checker Shows the minimum number of OK and NG judgments for the designated checker Shows the range ofthe OK and NG judgments of the designated checker The range is an absolute value between the maximum and minimum values Three items can b
283. tecting a region of the uncounted colour if the counted colour area at the point where the filter conditions are met is in touch with the bottom of the checker area when left right edge detection is being used or with the right of the checker area when up down edge detection is being used then if the width is equal to the width parameter it is treated as if an area of excluded colour had been recognized Figure 4 Width of Width of Detected object object Width Width parameter Width of object parameter i Width of object Filter parameter Filter parameter Set the filter parameter a little smaller or take the same precautions as for situation A 9 10 Chapter 10 Gray Scale Edge Checkers 10 1 Gray Scale Edge Checkers 2 10 3 10 1 1 Menu Screen cece eee ee 10 3 10 1 2 Checker Setting z 240 gt 10 4 10273 RESU Pines uses erste 10 11 10 2 Gray Scale Edge Checker Setup 10 13 Gray Scale Edge Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 10 2 Multichecker A210 A110 Gray Scale Edge Checkers 10 1 Gray Scale Edge Checkers 10 1 Gray Scale Edge Checkers Gray scale edge checkers use gray scale processing for precision detection of changes in gray scale outlines boundaries etc They are capable of detecting edge coordinates with sub pixel precision They can also judge whether or not a product is OK on the basis of the number of objects detected
284. template number IN1 to IN7 When READY is on input IN8 READY goes off and the template image re registration area is displayed If an error occurs at this point 1 processing is cancelled and an ERROR signal is output D While READY is off input IN8 again E After the template image re registration area disappears the template image is updated and READY goes back on 1 Typical causes of an error occurring at this point You specified a non existent checker The specified checker number is set for an image from a camera other than that set for the capture camera cp 16 38 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 7 Template Smart matching Re registration Re registration using serial input A Template No IN1 to IN7 f OFF E Ready signal READY ON C Template IN8 OFF B D re registration ON ON input In the case of Thru display image capture is z J performed first After this the checker is executed Re registration processing execution position smart matching adjustment performed position position adjustment and then the re regis tration area is displayed In the case of Binary dis play the display is temporarily switched to gray When READY is on input the template number on IN1 to IN7 When READY is on input IN8 READY goes off and the template image re registration area is displayed The re registra
285. th i Note Limitations that apply when an adjustment group is set When you want to set adjustment groups for the checkers note that the limitations given on the following page apply regarding the adjustment checkers that can be set lt Adjustment group setting limitations gt The A110 values are in brackets Adjustment checker Inspection adjustment checker lt adjustment source gt lt adjustment destination gt 1 01 to 32 01 to 32 1 01 to 16 01 to 16 2 33 10 64 DSN 33 to 64 2 17 to 32 17 to 32 3 65 to 96 NS 6510 96 3 33 to 48 33 to 48 It is not possible to adjust in a direction for which there is no arrow shown lt Adjustment group numbers that can be set for the checker numbers gt The A110 values are in brackets Adjustment group numbers that can be set Checker No 01 to 32 01 to 32 01 to 16 01 to 16 lt Block No 1 gt lt Block No 1 gt 33 to 64 01 to 32 33 to 64 17 to 32 01 to 16 17 to 32 lt Block No 2 gt lt Block No 1 and 2 gt 65 to 96 01 to 32 65 to 96 33 to 48 01 to 16 33 to 48 lt Block No 3 gt lt Block No 1 and 3 gt Multichecker A210 A110 Inspection Procedure 2 9 Selecting Camera 2 9 Selecting Camera Use the Select Camera setting for each checker to select scanning for the image captured by either camera A or Camera B Select Canera B If only one camera is c
286. the PLC registers Because the Image Checker can read the PLC registers all the PLC has to do is to write values to its own registers and issue the timing instruction TYPE in order to initiate a type switch Available PLCs for Computer Link Manufacture Model series name Available device Device No Matsushita Electric Works Ltd FP series A series Qseries Support for Type 4 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation FX series 0 to 9999 OMRON Corporation C series CV series CS1 series Allen Bradley SLC500 Limitations that apply when Computer Link mode is selected Except for key emulation none of the serial commands for the COM port can be used Therefore the following items that are not compatible with parallel communication cannot be used Referencing and changing the maximum and minimum slice level values Referencing and changing the gray scale edge threshold value Referencing and changing the maximum and minimum values for numerical calculations Initiating a type data save from an external device Resetting the spreadsheet from an external device i Note VBT Ver 2 is only compatible with the Tool port 16 56 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 13 Computer Link 16 13 2 Connection to aPLC Connection to the CCU or CPU COM Port ofthe Matsushita Electric Works FP Series PLC PLC Imagechecker we COM Connect
287. the following three combinations Labeling Boundary OFF ON ON OFF ON ON Multichecker A210 A110 Set and confirm the Slice Level No Set and confirm the Slice Level No for the base checker Slice Level No Set the base position Select and confirm the base position Press A to display the current detection coordinates detection angle and correlation for a maximum of five points 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 Feat Extr Theta Rot a Base Position A Test B Pos Dsp C Esc Select the appropriate base position from the table and press ENTER to register the selected coordinates and angle as the base position When you return to the setting menu the adjustment amounts AX AY and 490 are displayed at the top right of the screen Press B to confirm the base position for the image Press C to cancel the base position rw Refer to Setting the Base Position on page 4 17 for details Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 4 3 7 Setting One Checker and Two Checker Rotation Adjustment Checkers that use Feature Extraction A210 only This explains how to use a Feature Extraction checker as an adjustment checker If you are unfamiliar with the operation of Feature Extraction checkers read 11 Feature Extraction One checker rotation adjustment uses one checker and two checker rotation adjustment uses two checker
288. the screen Filter Set the filter condition for detection size in the scanning direction If the range is specified in the horizontal direction the filter condition can be set in the range from 2 to the length of the checker in the X direction If the range is specified in the vertical direction the filter condition can be set in the range from 2 to the length of the checker in the Y direction Width Set the filter condition for detection size across the scanning direction If the range is specified in the horizontal direction the filter condition can be set in the range from 1 to the length of the checker in the Y direction 1 If the range is specified in the vertical direction the filter condition can be set in the range from 1 to the length of the checker in the X direction 1 Multichecker A210 A110 Binary Edge Checkers 9 1 Binary Edge Checkers en SFR Tip Binary Edge Width and Filter 2 Scanning direction Width left to right i Edge condition W gt B y Vv 10 50 a K Width setting Width setting Width setting Width parameter 10 10 lt Width parameter 50 Width parameter gt 50 Edge detected at Edge detected at position No edge detected position marked marked The width parameter places conditions on the width across the scanning direction so that areas less than the minimum width s
289. the screen rm Refer to 13 4 Judgment Output for details regarding the Trap function Limit Condition Lim Cond The image is stored if any one of the upper or lower setting limits of the results of the three optional formulas set as limit conditions are exceeded rw For details regarding setting the limit conditions refer to Setting and Deleting Limit Conditions in 13 3 2 Creating a Numerical Calculation Programme 3 15 Environment and Type Multichecker A210 A110 3 2 Environment Settings Environment settings common for all types 71 Overwrite Tr ee Overwrite Yes Ho Yes When the total 30 A110 8 images have been stored in the image store memory the oldest image is overwritten if there is a trigger to capture more images No When the total 30 A110 8 images have been stored in the image store memory new images are not stored even if there is a trigger to capture more images Lock Image Sets a lock on individual stored images If you set a lock that image can never be overwritten Save Limit The A210 can store up to 30 screen images When using both the A and B cameras with the A210 be certain to store in two screen sets a maximum of 15 image sets can be stored The A110 can store up to 8 screen images It is not possible to delete stored images one at a time or switch them In addition it is not possible to specify the number under which an image is stored i Note Stored images are lost un
290. the specified block you are returned to the screen in step 1 If you wish to execute another block repeat steps 1 and 2 eS Note If the Start setting is set to Manual Repeat the same block is repeatedly executed 2 11 Inspection Procedure Multichecker A210 A110 2 3 Displayed Image and Test Functions 2 3 Displayed Image and Test Functions The image displayed is normally the image selected from the Display Image menu but in the Checker setup menu either a binary image or a gray scale image is displayed automatically according to the type of checker binary or gray scale The camera that displays the image is determined by the Select Camera setting for each of the binary checkers If the binary checker has already been set up the image is displayed according to the binarization level group for that checker The execution sequence when performing a test is position and rotation adjusters exposure adjuster line checkers binary window checkers gray scale window checkers binary edge checkers gray scale edge checkers then feature extractors and smart matching Numerical calculation judgment output and spreadsheets are not included in a test and there is no parallel or serial output The inspection time displayed represents only the time required to execute the checkers selected from the menu Execution sequence when inspection is performed by selecting Start is the same as the sequence described above Start can be sel
291. the three parallel signals Ready Start and Type Connect Error and OVF Overflow Flag as required x READY Refer to the section on the serial port in the hardware manual Y START regarding RS 232C connection Y TYPE X ERR x OVF Setting the PLC type Select 7 Environment 53 7 ENVIRONMENT 153 RIE me IN 531 Type No Register 0 532 Top Data Register 0 533 Timeo 5000ms 534 Outpu___PLC Type 16bit Serial Output and set 537 PLC Type Exim is MEW FP None 536 Judge MELSEC A None 1537 JR eo EV a 24 MEW FP OMRON C AB SLC 537 PLC Type MEW FP Matsushita Electric Works FP Series PLC MELSEC A Mitsubishi MELSEC A Series PLC Q series PLC Support for Type 4 MELSEC FX Mitsubishi MELSEC FX Series PLC 1 OMRON C Omron SYSMAC C Series PLC AB SLC Allen Bradley SLC500 PLC 2 The examples in this manual refer to the Matsushita Electric Works FP Series PLCs If you are using one of the other PLCs refer to this manual and note the following points Refer to the A210 A110 Multichecker Hardware Manual for details regarding connection to the PLC RS 232C connector Refer to the PLC manufacturers manuals regarding the PLC side parallel connector allocation Refer to the relevant PLC manufacturers manual regarding the commands and registers used for communication 16 57 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 13 Computer Link 1 St
292. the two checker types is identical and you must set two checkers In this example we will perform the settings for a Horizontal Detection Rotation Adjustment Checker Procedure 1 Select the Position Rotation Adjustment Checker number TYPE 1 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 1 BINARY EDGE DETECTION 2 GRAY EDGE DETECTION 3 FEATURE EXTRACTION 4 MATCHING 2 Select BINARY EDGE DETECTION 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 1 BINARY EDGE DETECTION 11 Pos Adj 12 Hor Det Rot Adj 13 Ver Det Rot Adj Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker 3 Select Hor Det Rot Adj or Ver Det Rot Adj The setting menu for position adjustment using binary edge detection is displayed Use Select Camera to select the camera and Delete Checker to delete the checker as required TYPE 1 1 POS ROT ADJ No 1 Binary Edge Pos Adj 1 elect Camera Checker 1 Checker 2 Slice Level No Base Pos 2 7 Fe age Pos Rot Adj Group Delete Checker 1 Select Camera Select either the camera A or camera B image for operating the Position Adjustment checker 2 Checker 1 3 Checker 2 Use these to create the checkers and set items such as the scan conditions 4 Slice Level No Select the Slice Level No for the base checker 5 Base Pos Execute a test to register the base position for adjustment 6 Pos Rot
293. tion area is decided at this point If an error occurs 1 processing is cancelled and an ERROR signal is output D While READY is off re input IN8 E After the template image re registration area disappears the template image is updated and the READY signal goes on cp 1 Typical causes of an error occurring at this point You specified a non existent checker The specified checker number is set for an image from a camera other than that set for the capture camera When re registration is specified at the execution position the result of number of detected objects from execution of the smart matching checker was 0 When re registration is specified at the adjustment position execution of position adjustment resulted in part of the template area protruding off the screen 16 39 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 7 Template Smart matching Re registration Setting Position Re registration Area Display No or Yes Execution Position Adjustment Position Re registration Area Display No Area display when set to Yes first IN8 input Error example Template No IN1 to IN7 gt OFF Ready signal READY ON Template N aon N8 OFF re registration x input ON Error signal ERROR OFF ON The ERROR signal output conditions are as follows Setting position You specified a non existent checker The specified checker number is set
294. to scan objects at the boundaries of the inspection area set up the checker so that the object comes at the top of the checker area when left right edge detection is being used or at the left of the checker area when up down edge detection is being used Binary Edge Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 9 3 Restrictions on Binary Edge Checkers B With a pattern like that shown in the diagram below if there is a section of the included colour positioned immediately before an area of the excluded colour and the bottom 8 bits of the width of the object in the width parameter direction are equal to the width parameter and moreover if the object is in touch with the bottom of the checker area when left right edge detection is being used or with the right of the checker area when up down edge detection is being used then in order to detect the object it must have a width of at least the filter parameter 1 Figure 3 Width of object Width of object gt Width of object bottom 8 bits bottom 8 bits Width of object Width parameter Width parameter N Width parameter Width parameter Cannot be detected Detected correctly if the width of the gap is filter parameter 1 p l Width of object Width of object wigth of object Hn of object Filter parameter Filter parameter Filter parameter Filter parameter Set the filter parameter so that is a little smaller than the actual gap C In de
295. tor for details Time Displays the time required for inspection It is possible to switch this to Outputs m Refer to 1 3 3 Changing Display Items for details Multichecker A210 A110 Screens and Basic Operations 1 2 Keypad 1 2 Keypad 1 2 1 Keypad All operations and settings forthe A210 A110 Multichecker are carried out with a special compact keypad 4 a 1 A button The start and test button When this button is pressed images are taken in from the camera and an inspection is carried out 2 B button This is primarily used as the display image mode switching button It is used to switch between Gray Scale and Binary and Through Memory and NG modes The type of the image that you switched to is displayed at the bottom of the screen w Refer to 1 3 2 Switching the Image Displayed on the Monitor for details 3 C button This button is used for mode switching between the display non display of menus icons checker patterns and so on as well as for selecting menus entering numerals canceling settings and returning to previous menus 4 Cursor lever ENTER button This button is used to select menu items and to draw or move the checker area When the centre is pressed the key acts as the ENTER button which is used to confirm the item just selected from the menu or the settings IE Note It is possible emulate keyboard operations by inputting serial commands from an external device to the COM port
296. tput 1S Notes With parallel output when communication mode is set to standard e If an error occurs judgment and numerical calculation outputs are 0 With serial output when communication mode is set to standard If an error occurs in the judgment register or numerical calculation register e is output If image capture fails all outputs are e e is not output when communication mode is set to Computer Link Parallel output conforms to the Computer Link mode protocol 18 4 Multichecker A210 A110 Error Output 18 2 Error Signal Output Conditions Image capturing When a problem occurs in the process of capturing an image Example When the camera settings and the connected camera do not match When the image is not captured successfully ia Note E0071 Abnormality occurred on the camera or the controller If the error message appears during inspection the following problems may be occurring a The camera that cannot be used in the camera mode set by selecting ENVIRONMENT gt Camera is connected For example a standard camera ANM831 is connected in Double Speed Random Frame mode b Incomplete insertion of the camera cable Turn the power off and try to insert the camera cable completely until it clicks again c Breaking of the camera cable d Failure of the camera e Failure of A210 A110 If that error message still appears after checking problems a a
297. tput If you switch the power off in this state your new data will be lost i Note Never switch off the power to the unit while it is in the process of saving data This can cause data loss and may destroy the system and make the unit impossible to restart 16 34 Multichecker A210 A110 Communications Serial and Parallel 16 7 Template Smart matching Re registration 16 7 Template Smart matching Re registration 16 7 1 Serial and Parallel Re registration Parallel Serial Details I O terminal Command IN1 to IN7 Smart matching Smart Matching No Smart number specification specification Matching Re registrationtiming IN8 Template Re registrationtiming ae Confirm by RDY Switching complete READY signal off to on transition Note If IN7 is used as the Smart Matching Checker No it is not possible to switch camera images w Refer to 16 2 6 Parallel Output Settings for details 16 35 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 7 Template Smart matching Re registration 16 7 2 Communication Settings Select Communication Parallel Output Setting Template 7 ENVIRONMENT 154 WET KEIN IT 541 Handshake Setting Template No 542 Reset Set Pos Latch 543 piur Exe Pos No Adj Pos Details Mode Set the following Whether or not to perform re registration The execution method Setting position R
298. ttings 16 14 Serial Parallel Communication Command Tables 16 17 16 3 1 Serial Command Table 16 17 16 3 2 Parallel Signal Allocation Table 16 20 Inspection Execution and Result Output Procedures Er Hera 16 21 16 4 1 Items related to serial parallel communications 16 21 16 4 2 Inspection Using Serial Communications 0 00 eee 16 22 16 4 3 Inspection Using Parallel Communication ze coed ie aaeeea 16 24 w next page Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 5 Type Switching nn Bice She ee re er 16 31 16 5 1 Items related to serial parallel communications 16 31 16 5 2 Common setting items for serial and parallel 2 2 0u 22242 8 16 31 16 5 3 Type switching using serial communication 22 2 3 22 2 Jans peed ares 16 32 16 5 4 Type switching using parallel Communication 0 00 eee eee 16 32 16 5 5 Points of caution regarding type switching 244444244 16 33 16 6 Saving Type Data 00 cece ee 16 34 16 6 1 Items related to serial and parallel communication 16 34 16 6 2 Saving type data using serial communication 2 oP be 2er ee 16 34 16 7 Template Smart matching Re registration 16 35 16 7 1 Serial and Parallel Re registration 16 35 16 7 2 Communication Settings 16 36 16 7 3 Re registration Method
299. umber appropriately Position Position adjustment 1 adjustment 1 ie R1 R1 Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment a Example 4 4 4 Position Adjustment Groups By specifying the position adjustment group number a position adjuster can be set to adjust the result of an earlier position adjuster multiple position adjustment This can be repeated to give several layers of nesting The example below shows three position adjusters The numbers represent the position adjuster number set from the position adjustment menu No 1 If a displaced workpiece is then inspected the result differs according to the group number settings 1 When the position adjusters have all been set independently If the group numbers are all different or all set to 0 as shown below inspection will only be performed by those checkers which have not gone outside the search area No 2 No 1 G 0 or 2 G Oor1 y No 3 u LJ oora Misalignment Position and Rotation Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 4 4 Position Adjustment Groups 2 When the position adjusters have been nested each adjusting the result of the previous adjuster Each adjuster works on the result of the position adjustment checker specified by the group number so that all the edges required are successfully detected Slightly misaligned for greater clarity No 2 No 1 lt Misalignment Position a
300. ur registers 2 1 Calculation result Displays the result of the numerical calculation 2 2 Calculation result Displays the result of the numerical calculation However if the result exceeds eight digits is displayed 3 Judgment Judges the result of numerical calculation to be OK if it is within the specified upper and lower limits and NG if it exceeds the limits Displays the result of judgment If a checker existed at the point of setup but has since been deleted or if there is an item which could previously be selected but can no longer be used for calculations then the judgment result in error and ER is displayed 13 6 Multichecker A210 A110 Optional Memory 13 3 Numerical Calculation Maximum Minimum Displays the upper and lower limits for the numerical calculation result You can use the Serial command to set and refer to the maximum and minimum values from an externally connected piece of equipment Refer to 16 11 Referencing and Changing the Maximum and Minimum Limits for Numerical calculations for details programs Displays the set calculation program A maximum of 90 characters can be set for the program Ex BWO1 four characters Data Bit Sets the data length for when you will output numerical calculation results using parallel output Key pad Start Press A to capture a new image and perform an inspection outputting parallel and serial signals in accordance with I O setting
301. ustment 2 220000 eee ees 5 3 5 1 1 Main Menu 2 ee 5 3 5 1 2 Checker Setting naanannnnnnaaaaa 5 5 Exposure Adjustment Setup annnnnnnnnnaaa 5 6 Example for Exposure Adjustment Setup 5 8 Exposure Adjustment Multichecker A210 A110 Multichecker A210 A110 Exposure Adjustment 5 1 Exposure Adjustment 5 1__ Exposure Adjustment In order that the image taken into gray scale memory is the optimum image for inspection exposure adjustment is performed by calculating the average value of the brightness data inside the area of an exposure adjustment checker and obtaining the optimum exposure adjustment from the difference between the measured value and a reference value If an exposure adjustment group is set for a binary checker the binarization level is adjusted by the amount of exposure adjustment ensuring optimum inspection You can set up to 96 exposure adjustment checkers per type for the A210 and up to 48 per type for the A110 5 1 1 Main Menu TYPE i 2 EXPOSURE ADJ Jud HG Ho 1 Average 0 Corr Value A Checker Setting Base Pos Rot Adj Group 0 Copy Checker 2 3 ass 4 Average Judgment lt 255 0 gt 5 6 7 Delete Checker No Checker No Set the number of the exposure adjuster to be created 1 Select Camera For the A210 select which camera A or B will supply the image on which the exposure adjustment checker is to be activated This is
302. ustment using gray edge detection is displayed Use Select Camera to select the camera and Delete Checker to delete the checker as required 1 POS ROT ADJ pets No 1 Y Gray Edge Pos Adj Jj Checker 1 Checker 2 Base Pos 7 7 sash Pos Rot Adj Group Delete Checker 1 Select Camera Select either the camera A or camera B image for operating the Position Adjustment checker 2 Checker 1 3 Checker 2 Use these to create the checkers and set items such as the scan conditions 4 Base Execute a test to register the base point for adjustment 5 Pos Rot Adj Group Set which checker is to be used for adjustment in the case that you are using multiple settings for position and rotation adjustment Select a group number rm Refer to 4 4 Position Adjustment Groups for details 6 Delete Checker Use this to delete a checker In the case that you have created both vertical and horizontal checkers select which one you want to delete eS Note If you delete a Position Adjustment Checker the inspection results for all checkers that follow the deleted checker are cleared Multichecker A210 A110 Position and Rotation Adjustment 4 4 3 Setting a Position Rotation Adjustment Checker Next perform the checker settings Select either Checker 1 or Checker 2 The setting procedure is the same for both checkers Select Checker 1 to display the Checker 1 setting menu 11 POS ROT ADJ No 1 Gray
303. utput Settings for details Smart Matching number BIN data lookup table Smart Matching No 22 16 37 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 7 Template Smart matching Re registration Timing Chart Setting Execution Position Adjustment and Re registration Area Display NO Template No IN1 to IN7 A OFF Ready signal READY ON C Template B OFF re registration AIN8 ONNG input ee Setting Re registration executed Execution Re registration executed after execution of smart matching Adjustment Re registration executed after execution of position adjustment If a Thru image is displayed operation is as above after the image capture is executed A When READY is on input the template number IN1 to IN7 B When READY is on input IN8 C READY goes off After the template image is updated READY goes back on Setting and Re registration Area Display YES Template No IN1 to IN7 y OFF Ready signal READY on E Template IN OF B re registration ON ON input played If the display is binarized setting position In the case of Thru it is temporarily changed to gray display the image is captured before The re registration area is dis es is performed at the scale the re registration is performed When READY is on input the
304. values of the slice levels A to F corresponding to 1 to 6 L minimum maximum Cr ICH to External device Slice level maximum and minimum value notification command Output in response to the slice level maximum and minimum value reference command T minimum maximum CR External device to ICH Slice level maximum and minimum value modify command Modifies the maximum and minimum values ofthe slice levels A to F corresponding to 1 to 6 T minimum maximum Cr ICH to External device Modification complete command Output when modification of the slice level maximum and minimum values is completed normally K CR External device to ICH Gray scale edge threshold value reference command References the gray scale edge threshold value Registers numbers are from 01 to 96 01 to 48 for the A110 16 17 Communications Serial and Parallel Multichecker A210 A110 16 3 Serial Parallel Communication Command Tables K thres value CR ICH to External device Function Gray scale edge threshold value notification command Output in response to the gray scale edge threshold reference command G minimum maximum Cr External device to ICH Gray scale edge threshold value modify command Modifies the gray scale edge threshold value Registers numbers are from 01 to 96 01 to 48 for the A110 G minimum
305. w Refer to 16 12 Key Emulate Screens and Basic Operations Multichecker A210 A110 1 2 Keypad 1 2 2 Operating the Cursor lever ENTER button Buttons A B and C These buttons have the functions displayed at the bottom of the screen Operating the cursor The cursor can move in any of 8 directions To move the cursor move the lever to the gt direction Q Q 4 F Down Right Up right Down rig E Downen Up left Operating the ENTER button To confirm i e enter input press the centre of the cursor lever Press straight downwards as Note If you happen to press the ENTER button by accident while operating the cursor lever you may carry out an input operation by mistake To guard against this remove your finger from the cursor lever when changing direction Multichecker A210 A110 Screens and Basic Operations 1 3 Main Screen Operations 1 3 Main Screen Operations 1 3 1 Menu Selection Use the cursor lever to select an item then press ENTER to confirm your selection The selected screen will be displayed To return to the previous menu press C Esc These operations which are basically the same for all menus are illustrated below e 2 e oa dla C 3 INSPECTION CHECKER 5 i 31 LIHE f 8 Use the i 33 GRAY HIHDOH cursor leverto 34 BINARY EDGE DETECTION select anitem 35 GRAY EDGE DETECT IO 36 FEATURE EXTRACTION 37 SHART HATCHING Ce ee ee A Test By I
306. when changing the adjuster group which has an angle of rotation an Area will be changed OK message is displayed Select Yes to change the group number The execution position angle of the checker adjusted for position or rotation will change at that point If you select No the group number will not change If the position and rotation adjustment group is specified before setting an area then when setting the area the image is displayed according to the rotation angle enabling the area to be set at the required position If the position and rotation adjustment group is specified after setting an area the execution position of the checker may change according to the amount of adjustment requiring the area to be set again For the A110 Sets the active position adjustment number within the type Only pre set position adjuster can be set here The corresponding position adjuster pattern is displayed brightly during number selection Multichecker A210 A110 Inspection Procedure eS Note 2 7 Specifying Position and Rotation Adjustment Group Limitations that apply when an adjustment group is set When you want to set adjustment groups for the checkers note that the limitations given on the following page apply regarding the adjustment checkers that can be set lt Adjustment group setting limitations gt The A110 values are in brackets Adjustment checker Insp
307. white or black lands on the line The land filter set ting determines how many pixels of the specified colour have to occur con secutively to be regarded as a land and the gap filter setting determines how many pixels of the other colour have to occur consecutively to be re garded as a gap between lands The number of lands is counted by apply ing these filters This method compares the count of lands of the specified colour with the land judgment conditions to judge whether or not the count is within the limits 0 0006 000 Black dot count 1 Land filter 6 Gap filter 4 Multichecker A210 A110 Multichecker A210 A110 Line Checkers 6 1 Line Checkers Land filter and gap filter The land and gap filters specify how large a consecutive block of pixels has to be along the line to be counted as a land and how large a gap there has to be to mark the end of a land Taking the line below as an example see how changing the line filter and gap filter settings changes the number of lands reported oo 09668 COCO Start point Black specified as color for lands End point Black dot count 12 1 Land filter 2 gap filter 3 oo 0000 006 Start point End peint Black land Black land Less than three white pixels does not meet the condition of the gap filter so is not regarded as a gap Black dot count 12 Land count 2 2 Land filter 2 gap filter 1 Star
308. wn Left 3 Right Grav Area Perin x 366 9 A Test In camera mode Capture a new image from the camera and perform an inspection In memory mode Perform an inspection on a image from memory without capturing a new image from the camera Display the results after inspection 11 10 Multichecker A210 A110 Feature Extraction 11 1 Feature Extraction Det No 1 CG X 269 7 CG Y 145 9 Areas BsDisp All CsEsc Prev sHext B Disp All Turns off the display of results and displays the overall centre of gravity marked with C Esc Pressing C returns to the display of results 1 Prev Displays the centre of gravity ofthe land immediately prior to the one currently being displayed Pressing this from No 1 displays the centre of gravity for the last land the land with the largest detection number Next Displays the centre of gravity of the land immediately following the one currently being displayed Pressing this from the last land detected displays No 1 11 11 Feature Extraction Multichecker A210 A110 11 2 Output Values for Detection Results 11 2 Output Values for Detection Results Output value Display on screen Output precision Grav X 0 to 5110 0 to 511 0 x10 Grav Y 0 to 4790 0 to 479 0 x10 Perim 0 to 245760 0 to 245760 x1 Area 0 to 245760 0 to 245760 x1 Theta 899 to 900 1800 89 9 to 90 0 180 0 x10 Proj X 1to 511 1to 511 x1 Proj
309. y Window Checkers 000 cence nn 7 3 7 1 1 Main Menu 222222025 een 7 3 7 1 2 Checker Settings 002eeeeeee 7 5 7 1 3 Select the Adjustment Group 7 5 7 2 Binary Window Checker Setup 04 7 6 Binary Window Checkers Multichecker A210 A110 Multichecker A210 A110 Binary Window Checkers 7 1 Binary Window Checkers 7 1 Binary Window Checkers Binary window checkers are used for creating a checker area as required for the area to be inspected and measuring the area of specified colour within the area You can set up to 96 checkers for each type in the case ofthe A210 48 for the A110 Binary window checkers can be shaped as rectangles circles or polygons and rectangles circles and polygons can be used as mask shapes 71 1 Main Menu TYPE i 32 BINARY HINDOH Jud HG Ho 1 Area 1 Select Caner A Slice Level No A Checker Setting Area Judgnent lt 245760 Adj Group Copy Checker Delete Checker No Checker No Set the number of the binary window checker to be created 1 Select Camera For the A210 select which camera A or B will supply the image on which the binary window checker is to be activated This is fixed at A in the case ofthe A110 2 Slice Level No Select the binary level group for the binary window checker being created 3 Checker Setting Create the binary window checker and set parameters etc 4 Area Judgment Based on the

Multichecker V2

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents